UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
WASHINGTON, D.C.  20549

FORM 10-K

ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE

SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934


For the fiscal year ended January 28, 2005


Commission file number: 001-11421


DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION
( Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in its Charter )


TENNESSEE
(State or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)

61-0502302
(I.R.S. Employer
Identification Number)

 

100 MISSION RIDGE
GOODLETTSVILLE, TN  37072
(Address of principal executive offices, zip code)

 

Registrant’s telephone number, including area code:   (615) 855-4000

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 


Title of Each Class


Common Stock

Series B Junior Participating
Preferred Stock Purchase Rights

Name of the Exchange on
which Registered

New York Stock Exchange

New York Stock Exchange


Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:   None

Indicate by check mark whether the Registrant:  (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the Registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes [X] No [   ]






Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of Registrant’s knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K. [   ]

Indicate by check mark whether the Registrant is an accelerated filer (as defined in Exchange Act Rule 12b-2). Yes [X ] No [   ]

The aggregate market value of the voting stock held by non-affiliates of the Registrant, computed by reference to the closing price on the New York Stock Exchange as of July 30, 2004, is approximately $5.86 billion. The Registrant has no non-voting common stock.  For purposes of this disclosure only, the Registrant has assumed that its directors, executive officers, beneficial owners of greater than 10% of the Registrant’s common stock and any other person who files reports under Section 16 of the Exchange Act are the “affiliates” of the Registrant.  

The number of shares of common stock outstanding on April 4, 2005, was 328,645,056.

Documents Incorporated by Reference

The information required in Part III of this Form 10-K is incorporated by reference to the Registrant’s definitive proxy statement to be filed for the Annual Meeting of Shareholders to be held on May 24, 2005.







The following text contains references to years 2005, 2004, 2003, 2002, 2001 and 2000, which represent fiscal years ending or ended February 3, 2006, January 28, 2005, January 30, 2004, January 31, 2003, February 1, 2002 and February 2, 2001, respectively.  This discussion and analysis should be read with, and is qualified in its entirety by, the consolidated financial statements and the notes thereto.

PART I

ITEM 1.

BUSINESS

General

Dollar General Corporation (the “Company” or “Dollar General”) is a leading discount retailer of quality general merchandise at everyday low prices.  Through conveniently located stores, the Company offers a focused assortment of consumable basic merchandise including health and beauty aids, packaged food products, home cleaning supplies, housewares, stationery, seasonal goods, basic clothing and domestics.  Dollar General stores serve primarily low-, middle- and fixed-income families.  

The Company was founded in 1939 as J.L. Turner and Son, Wholesale.  The Company opened its first dollar store in 1955, when the Company was first incorporated as a Kentucky corporation under the name J.L. Turner & Son, Inc.  The Company changed its name to Dollar General Corporation in 1968 and reincorporated as a Tennessee corporation in 1998.  As of April 1, 2005, the Company operated 7,494 stores in 30 states, primarily in the southern, eastern and midwestern United States.

Overall Business Strategy

Dollar General’s mission statement is “Serving Others.” To carry out this mission, the Company has developed a business strategy of providing its customers with a focused assortment of fairly priced, consumable basic merchandise in a convenient, small-store format.

Our Customers .  The Company serves the consumable basics needs of customers primarily in the low- and middle-income brackets and those on fixed incomes.  Research performed by an outside service on behalf of the Company in 2001 indicated that approximately 55% of its customers lived in households earning less than $30,000 a year, and approximately 36% earned less than $20,000.  The Company has not engaged an outside service to update this research since 2001; however, according to AC Nielsen’s 2004 Homescan® data, in 2004 approximately 48% of the Company’s customers lived in households earning less than $30,000 a year and approximately 26% earned less than $20,000.  The Company’s merchandising and operating strategies are designed to meet the need for consumable basics of the consumers in these groups.

Our Stores .  The average Dollar General store has approximately 6,800 square feet of selling space and generally serves customers who live within five miles of the store.  Of the Company’s 7,494 stores operating as of April 1, 2005, approximately 4,300 stores serve communities with populations of 20,000 or less.  The Company believes that its target customers prefer the convenience of a small, neighborhood store.  As the discount store industry continues



3






to move toward larger, “super-center” type stores, which are often built outside of towns, the Company believes that Dollar General’s convenient discount store format will continue to attract customers and provide the Company with a competitive advantage.  

In 2003, the Company began testing a Dollar General Market concept.  Dollar General Markets are larger than the average Dollar General store and carry, among other things, an expanded assortment of grocery products and perishable items.  At April 1, 2005, the Company operated 19 Dollar General Market stores with an average of 17,500 square feet of selling space.  The Company expects to open at least 30 Dollar General Market stores in 2005.

Our Merchandise .  The Company is committed to offering a focused assortment of quality, consumable basic merchandise in a number of core categories, such as health and beauty aids, packaged food products, home cleaning supplies, housewares, stationery, seasonal goods, basic clothing and domestics.  Because the Company offers a focused assortment of consumable basic merchandise, customers are able to shop at Dollar General stores for their everyday household needs.  In 2004, the average customer purchase was $8.64.

Our Prices .  The Company distributes quality, consumable basic merchandise at everyday low prices. Its strategy of a low-cost operating structure and a focused assortment of merchandise allows the Company to offer quality merchandise at highly competitive prices.  As part of this strategy, the Company emphasizes even-dollar price points.  In the typical Dollar General store, the majority of the products are priced at $10 or less, with approximately one-third of the products priced at $1 or less.  

Our Cost Controls .  The Company emphasizes aggressive management of its overhead cost structure. Additionally, the Company seeks to locate stores in neighborhoods where rental and operating costs are relatively low. The Company attempts to control operating costs by implementing new technology where feasible. Examples of this strategy in recent years include improvements to the Company’s supply chain and warehousing systems, the introduction of loss prevention software designed to identify unusual cash register transactions and the implementation of a new merchandise planning system designed to assist the Company’s merchants with their purchasing and store allocation decisions.

Growth Strategy

The Company has experienced a rapid rate of expansion in recent years, increasing its number of stores from 4,294 as of January 28, 2000, to 7,494 as of April 1, 2005.  In addition to growth from new store openings, the Company recorded same-store sales increases of 3.2% and 4.0% in 2004 and 2003, respectively.  Same-store sales increases are calculated based on the comparable calendar weeks in the prior year.  Same-store sales calculations for a given period include only those stores that were open both at the end of that period and at the beginning of the preceding fiscal year. Management will continue to seek to grow the Company’s business and believes that this future growth will come from a combination of new store openings, infrastructure investments and merchandising initiatives.

New Store Growth .  Management believes that the Company’s convenient, small-store format is adaptable to small towns and neighborhoods throughout the country.  The majority of



4






the Company’s stores are located in these small towns (defined by the Company as communities with populations of 20,000 or less).  In 2004, slightly over half of the Company’s new stores were opened in small towns while the remainder were opened outside of towns or in more densely populated areas.  The Company expects a similar mix of new store openings between small towns and other areas in 2005.  New store openings in 2005 will include the Company’s existing market area as well as new geographic areas where management believes the Company has the potential to expand its store base. Opening stores in its existing market area allows the Company to take advantage of brand awareness and to maximize its operating efficiencies.

 In 2004, the Company expanded its operating area to include Wisconsin, Arizona and New Mexico, states which management believes are competitively underserved and offer the potential for additional growth for the Company.  As of April 1, 2005, the Company had 55 stores in Wisconsin, 29 stores in Arizona and 24 stores in New Mexico. The Company expects to continue to explore the potential for expansion into additional geographic markets as opportunities present themselves.  

In 2004, 2003 and 2002, the Company opened 722, 673 and 622 new stores, and remodeled or relocated 80, 76 and 73 stores, respectively.  The Company currently expects to open approximately 700 new Dollar General stores and at least 30 new Dollar General Market stores in 2005.  Some of the new Dollar General Markets will be conversions of traditional stores.

Infrastructure Investments . In recent years, the Company has made significant investments in its distribution network. As of April 1, 2005, the Company operated seven distribution centers (“DCs”). The Company’s eighth DC near Jonesville, South Carolina is expected to be completed and fully operational in mid-2005.  In addition, the Company plans to select a site for and begin construction of its ninth DC during 2005.  The Company’s distribution network is an integral component of the Company’s efforts to reduce transportation expenses and effectively support the Company’s growth.  In addition, the Company has recently expanded its DCs in South Boston, Virginia and Ardmore, Oklahoma, and has substantially completed the conversion of these DCs from single to dual sortation systems, which enables them to serve more stores.  As of April 1, 2005, each of the Company’s seven existing DCs, on average, serviced approximately 1,070 stores with an average distance per delivery of approximately 235 miles.

The Company has made significant investments in technology in recent years. In 2004, a merchandising data warehouse was added, the rollout of credit/debit and/or electronic benefit transfer (“EBT”) capabilities was completed and an automatic inventory replenishment system was installed in all stores. In addition, a new stock ledger (implemented in 2005) and sales flash system were completed. Also, for the first time, store district managers were equipped with personal computers to enable them to access daily merchandising information. In 2003, the Company implemented an improved warehouse management system, a DC appointment scheduling system, an inventory reconciliation system, allocation system improvements, shortage analysis reporting, improvements to automated DC replenishment systems, and began the rollout of credit/debit and EBT to the stores. Technology initiatives in 2002 included the establishment of perpetual inventories in all stores, a new order processing system, new loss prevention software, systems for a new import deconsolidation function, the establishment of a business-to-



5






business website for supply chain efficiencies, and systems to enable automated store replenishment.

Merchandising Initiatives .  The Company’s merchandising initiatives are designed to promote same-store sales increases.  The Company continually evaluates the performance of its merchandise mix and makes adjustments when appropriate.  In recent years, the Company has increased its emphasis on the highly consumable category by adding items in the food, paper, household chemicals, and health and beauty aids categories. Also in recent years, the Company began offering perishable products, which includes a selection of dairy products, luncheon meats, frozen foods and ice cream. The expansion of perishable product offerings into additional stores was a significant 2004 initiative, increasing from 2,445 stores at the end of 2003 to 6,755 stores at the end of 2004.  

Prior to 2000, the Company’s strategy was generally to avoid marking items down from the everyday low retail price with the exception of damaged product which was typically marked down to zero and disposed of.  In 2000, and in subsequent years, in addition to continuing its practice of marking down damaged product, the Company selectively marked down slower moving and discontinued items.  In the fourth quarter of 2003, and principally at the conclusion of the holiday selling season, the Company took end-of-season markdowns materially in excess of what it had taken in prior years to help dispose of certain holiday-related items that had not sold in sufficient quantities.  In the past, the Company would have carried that inventory forward and would have attempted to adjust future inventory purchases to account for the carryover product.  In 2004, the Company continued this practice of emphasizing the in-season sale of seasonal merchandise by taking progressive, end-of-season markdowns.  The Company intends to continue this ongoing year-round strategy.  Management expects to establish the appropriate size of such markdowns by means of an ongoing cost benefit analysis that considers factors such as the potential corresponding increase in sales and a potential reduction in shrink and inventory handling and carrying costs.  

Merchandise

Dollar General stores offer a focused assortment of quality, consumable basic merchandise in a number of core categories. The Company separates its merchandise into the following four categories for internal reporting purposes: highly consumable, seasonal, home products, and basic clothing.

The percentage of total sales of each of the four categories tracked by the Company for the preceding three years is as follows:

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

Highly consumable

63.0

%

 

61.2

%

 

60.2

%

Seasonal

16.5

%

 

16.8

%

 

16.3

%

Home products

11.5

%

 

12.5

%

 

13.3

%

Basic clothing

9.0

%

 

9.5

%

 

10.2

%




6






Of the four categories, the seasonal category typically records the highest gross profit rate and the highly consumable category typically records the lowest gross profit rate.  

The Company purchases its merchandise from a wide variety of suppliers. Approximately 10% of the Company’s purchases in 2004 were made from Procter and Gamble.  No other supplier accounted for more than 3% of the Company’s purchases in 2004.  The Company directly imported approximately 15% of the Company’s retail receipts in 2004.

The Company generally does not run weekly advertising circulars but does advertise to support new store openings primarily with targeted circulars promoting those openings and in-store signage.  Advertising expenses are less than 1% of sales.

The Company maintains approximately 4,470 core stock-keeping units (“SKUs”) per store. The Company’s average customer purchase in 2004 was $8.64. The average number of items in each customer purchase was 5.8, and the average price of each purchased item was $1.50.

The Company’s business is modestly seasonal in nature.  The only extended seasonal increase in business that the Company experiences occurs during the Christmas selling season.  During the Christmas selling season, the Company carries merchandise that it does not carry during the rest of the year, such as gift sets, trim-a-tree, certain baking items, and a broader assortment of toys and candy.  The fourth quarter generated the following respective percentages of the Company’s annual revenues and net income: 2004 – 29% and 39%, 2003 – 29% and 34%, and 2002 – 29% and 40%.  

The Dollar General Store

The typical Dollar General store is operated by a manager, an assistant manager and two or more sales clerks.  Approximately 54% of the Company’s stores are located in strip shopping centers, 44% are in freestanding buildings and 2% are in downtown buildings.  The Company generally has not encountered difficulty locating suitable store sites in the past, and management does not currently anticipate experiencing material difficulty in finding suitable locations at favorable rents.

The Company’s recent store growth is summarized in the following table:

Year

Stores at
Beginning
of Year

Stores
Opened

Stores
Closed

Net
Store
Increase

Stores at
End of Year

2002

5,540

622

49

 

573

6,113

2003

6,113

673

86

 

587

6,700

2004

6,700

722

102

 

620

7,320




7






Employees

As of April 1, 2005, the Company employed approximately 63,200 full-time and part-time employees, including divisional and regional managers, district managers, store managers, and DC and administrative personnel, compared with approximately 57,800 employees on February 27, 2004.  Management believes the Company’s relationship with its employees is generally good.

Competition

The Company is engaged in a highly competitive business with respect to price, store location, merchandise quality, assortment and presentation, in-stock consistency, and customer service.  The Company competes with discount stores and with many other retailers, including mass merchandise, grocery, drug, convenience, variety and other specialty stores.  Some of the nation’s largest retail companies operate stores in areas where the Company operates.  The Company’s direct competitors in the dollar store retail category include Family Dollar, Dollar Tree, Fred’s and various local, independent operators.  Competitors from other retail categories include CVS, Rite Aid, Walgreens, Eckerd, Wal-Mart and Kmart.  Some of the Company’s competitors from outside the dollar store segment are better capitalized than the Company.

The dollar store category differentiates itself from other forms of retailing by offering consistently low prices in a convenient, small-store format.  The Company believes that its prices are competitive because of its low cost operating structure and the relatively limited assortment of products offered.  Labor and marketing expenses are minimized by fewer price points, relying on simple merchandise presentation, and the limited use of circulars.  The Company attempts to locate primarily in second-tier locations, either in small towns or in the neighborhoods of more densely populated areas where occupancy expenses are relatively low.  The Company believes that its limited assortment of products allows it to focus its purchasing efforts on fewer SKUs than other retailers, which helps keep its cost of goods relatively low.

Trademarks

The Company, through its affiliate, Dollar General Intellectual Property, L.P., has registered with the United States Patent and Trademark Office the trademarks Dollar General®, Clover Valley®, DG Guarantee® and the Dollar General price point designs, along with certain other trademarks. The Company attempts to obtain registration of its trademarks whenever possible and to pursue vigorously any infringement of those marks.

Available Information

The Company’s website address is www.dollargeneral.com .  The Company makes available through this address, without charge, its annual report on Form 10-K, quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, current reports on Form 8-K and amendments to those reports filed or furnished pursuant to Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Exchange Act as soon as reasonably practicable after they are electronically filed or furnished to the Securities and Exchange Commission.



8






ITEM 2.

PROPERTIES

As of April 1, 2005, the Company operated 7,494 retail stores located in 30 states as follows:

State

Number of Stores

 

State

Number of Stores

Alabama

396

   

Missouri

302

 

Arizona

29

   

Nebraska

84

 

Arkansas

207

   

New Jersey

24

 

Delaware

24

   

New Mexico

24

 

Florida

425

   

New York

200

 

Georgia

429

   

North Carolina

420

 

Illinois

297

   

Ohio

388

 

Indiana

274

   

Oklahoma

252

 

Iowa

164

   

Pennsylvania

388

 

Kansas

147

   

South Carolina

274

 

Kentucky

269

   

Tennessee

367

 

Louisiana

294

   

Texas

905

 

Maryland

65

   

Virginia

250

 

Michigan

175

   

West Virginia

140

 

Mississippi

226

   

Wisconsin

55

 


Most of the Company’s stores are located in leased premises.  Individual store leases vary as to their terms, rental provisions and expiration dates. In 2004, the Company’s aggregate store rental expense was approximately $5.72 per square foot of selling space. The majority of the Company’s leases are relatively low-cost, short-term leases (usually with initial or primary terms of three to five years) with multiple renewal options when available. The Company also has stores subject to build-to-suit arrangements with landlords, which typically carry a primary lease term of between 7 and 10 years with multiple renewal options. In recent years, an increasing percentage of the Company’s new stores have been subject to build-to-suit arrangements. In 2005, the Company expects approximately 500 of its new stores to be subject to build-to-suit arrangements.

As of April 1, 2005, the Company had seven DCs serving Dollar General stores, as described in the following table:

Location

Year
Opened

Approximate Square
Footage

 

Approximate Number of Stores Served

Scottsville, Kentucky

1959

720,000

   

907

 

Ardmore, Oklahoma

1994

1,310,000

   

1,109

 

South Boston, Virginia

1997

1,250,000

   

1,166

 

Indianola, Mississippi

1998

820,000

   

767

 

Fulton, Missouri

1999

1,150,000

   

1,256

 

Alachua, Florida

2000

980,000

   

901

 

Zanesville, Ohio

2001

1,170,000

   

1,388

 


The Company owns the DCs located in Kentucky, Florida, and Ohio and leases the other four DCs.  In a move to further enhance the Company’s distribution network, the Company is constructing a 1.1 million square-foot DC near Jonesville, South Carolina on a 177-acre site.  Located approximately 15 miles south of Spartanburg, the facility is expected to employ more than 600 people when it reaches full capacity.  The Company anticipates the facility to be fully operational in mid-2005.




9






The Company’s executive offices are located in approximately 302,000 square feet of owned space in Goodlettsville, Tennessee.  

ITEM 3.

LEGAL PROCEEDINGS

Restatement-Related Proceedings

As previously disclosed in the Company’s periodic reports filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”), the Company restated its audited financial statements for fiscal years 1999 and 1998, and certain unaudited financial information for fiscal year 2000, by means of its Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended February 2, 2001, which was filed on January 14, 2002 (the “2001 Restatement”).

The SEC conducted an investigation into the circumstances giving rise to the 2001 Restatement and, on January 8, 2004, the Company received notice that the SEC staff was considering recommending that the SEC bring a civil injunctive action against the Company for alleged violations of the federal securities laws in connection with circumstances relating to the 2001 Restatement.  The Company subsequently reached an agreement in principle with the SEC staff to settle the matter.  Under the terms of the agreement in principle, the Company, without admitting or denying the allegations in a complaint to be filed by the SEC, will consent to the entry of a permanent civil injunction against future violations of the antifraud, books and records, reporting and internal control provisions of the federal securities laws and related SEC rules and will pay a $10 million non-deductible civil penalty.  The Company is not entitled to seek reimbursement from its insurers with regard to this settlement.

The Company has been informed that the SEC approved the agreement and intends to file its Complaint and the proposed Final Judgment and Consent and Undertakings of Dollar General Corporation with the United States District Court for the Middle District of Tennessee. The agreement and order are subject to final approval by the Court. The Company accrued $10 million with respect to the penalty in its financial statements for the year ended January 30, 2004, and this accrual remains outstanding as of January 28, 2005.  The Company can give no assurances that the Court will approve this agreement and order.  If the agreement and order are not approved, the Company could be subject to different or additional penalties, both monetary and non-monetary, which could materially and adversely affect the Company’s financial statements as a whole.  


Other Litigation

On March 14, 2002, a complaint was filed in the United States District Court for the Northern District of Alabama ( Edith Brown, on behalf of herself and others similarly situated v. Dolgencorp. Inc., and Dollar General Corporation , CV02-C-0673-W (“ Brown ”)) to commence a collective action against the Company on behalf of current and former salaried store managers.  The complaint alleges that these individuals were entitled to overtime pay and should not have been classified as exempt employees under the Fair Labor Standards Act (“FLSA”).  Plaintiffs seek to recover overtime pay, liquidated damages, declaratory relief and attorneys’ fees.  



10






On January 12, 2004, the court certified an opt-in class of plaintiffs consisting of all persons employed by the Company as store managers at any time since March 14, 1999, who regularly worked more than 50 hours per week and either: (1) customarily supervised less than two employees at one time; (2) lacked authority to hire or discharge employees without supervisor approval; or (3) sometimes worked in non-managerial positions at stores other than the one he or she managed. The Company’s attempt to appeal this decision on a discretionary basis to the 11 th Circuit Court of Appeals was denied.

Notice was sent to prospective class members and the deadline for individuals to opt in to the lawsuit was May 31, 2004.  Approximately 5,000 individuals opted in.  The Court has entered a scheduling order that governs the discovery and remaining phases of the case.

Three additional lawsuits, Tina Depasquales v. Dollar General Corp. (Southern District of Georgia, Savannah Division, CV 404-096, filed May 12, 2004), Karen Buckley v. Dollar General Corp. (Southern District of Ohio, C-2-04-484, filed June 8, 2004), and Sheila Ann Hunsucker v. Dollar General Corp. et al. (Western District of Oklahoma, Civ-04-165-R, filed February 19, 2004), were filed asserting essentially the same claims as the Brown case, all of which have since been consolidated in the Northern District of Alabama where the Brown litigation is pending. The Company believes that the consolidation will not affect the scheduling order or extend any of the deadlines in the Brown case.

The Company believes that its store managers are and have been properly classified as exempt employees under the FLSA and that the action is not appropriate for collective action treatment.  The Company intends to vigorously defend the action.  However, no assurances can be given that the Company will be successful in defending this action on the merits or otherwise, and, if not, the resolution could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial statements as a whole.

The Company is involved in other legal actions and claims arising in the ordinary course of business. The Company currently believes that such other litigation and claims, both individually and in the aggregate, will be resolved without a material effect on the Company’s financial statements as a whole.  However, litigation involves an element of uncertainty.  Future developments could cause these actions or claims to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial statements as a whole.

ITEM 4.

SUBMISSION OF MATTERS TO A VOTE OF SECURITY HOLDERS

No matters were submitted to shareholders during the fourth quarter of 2004.



11






ITEM 4A.

EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF THE REGISTRANT

Information regarding the executive officers of the Company is set forth below. The Company’s executive officers serve at the pleasure of the Board of Directors and are elected annually by the Board to serve until their successors are duly elected.

Name

Age

Position

David A. Perdue

55

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

David M. Tehle

48

Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

Kathleen R. Guion

53

Executive Vice President, Store Operations and Store Development

Thomas J. Hartshorn

54

Executive Vice President, New Business Development

Susan S. Lanigan

42

Executive Vice President and General Counsel

Stonie R. O’Briant

51

Executive Vice President, Merchandising, Marketing and Strategic Planning

Lloyd Davis

48

Senior Vice President, Supply Chain Operations

Robert A. Lewis

43

Senior Vice President and Controller

Jeffrey R. Rice

41

Vice President, Human Resources


Mr. Perdue joined Dollar General on April 2, 2003 as Chief Executive Officer and as a member of the Board of Directors. He was elected Chairman on June 2, 2003. Prior to joining Dollar General, Mr. Perdue served as Chairman and Chief Executive Officer of Pillowtex Corporation, a leading producer and marketer of home textiles, from July 2002 through March 27, 2003. Pillowtex filed for bankruptcy in July 2003 after emerging from a previous bankruptcy in May 2002. Mr. Perdue also served as Executive Vice President (January 2001 to July 2002) and Senior Vice President, Global Supply Chain (September 1998 to October 1999) of Reebok International Ltd., as well as President and Chief Executive Officer (January 2001 to July 2002) and Executive Vice President, Global Operating Units (October 1999 to January 2001) of the Reebok Brand. From 1994 to September 1998, Mr. Perdue was Senior Vice President of Haggar, Inc., where he was responsible for all aspects of operations from planning through distribution. From 1992 until 1994, he was based in Hong Kong as Senior Vice President of Operations for Sara Lee Corp. Mr. Perdue has served as a director of Alliant Energy Corporation since 2001.


Mr. Tehle joined Dollar General in June 2004 as Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. He served from 1997 to June 2004 as Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Haggar Corporation, a manufacturing, marketing and retail corporation. From 1996 to 1997, he was Vice President of Finance for a division of The Stanley Works, one of the world’s largest manufacturers of tools and from 1993 to 1996, he was Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Hat Brands, Inc., a hat manufacturer. Mr. Tehle has served as a director of Jack in the Box, Inc. since December 2004.


Ms. Guion joined Dollar General in October 2003 as Executive Vice President, Store Operations. She was named Executive Vice President, Store Operations and Store Development in February 2005. From 2000 until joining Dollar General, Ms. Guion served as President and Chief Executive Officer of Duke and Long Distributing Company, a convenience store chain operator and wholesale distributor of petroleum products that filed for bankruptcy in November 2000. Prior to that time, she served as an operating partner for Devon Partners (1999-2000), where she developed operating plans and assisted in the identification of acquisition targets in the convenience store



12






industry, and as President and Chief Operating Officer of E-Z Serve Corporation (1997-1998), an owner/operator of convenience stores, mini-marts and gas marts. From 1987 to 1997, Ms. Guion served as the Vice President and General Manager of the largest division (Chesapeake Division) of company-owned stores at 7-Eleven, Inc., a convenience store chain. Other positions held by Ms. Guion during her tenure at 7-Eleven include District Manager, Zone Manager, Operations Manager, and Division Manager (Midwest Division).


Mr. Hartshorn joined Dollar General as Vice President, Operations in 1992 and became Vice President, Merchandising Operations in 1993.  He was named Senior Vice President, Logistics and Merchandising Operations in February 2000 and then Executive Vice President, Merchandising in February 2001. He assumed his current position as Executive Vice President, New Business Development in August 2003. Before joining Dollar General, Mr. Hartshorn was Director of Store Operations for McCrory/TG&Y, a retailing company. Mr. Hartshorn joined TG&Y in 1968 and held various operations management positions, including Corporate Directors of Store Operations, Expense and Budget Control; Territorial Director of Store Operations; District Manager; and Store Manager.


Ms. Lanigan joined Dollar General in July 2002 as Vice President, General Counsel and Corporate Secretary. She was promoted to Senior Vice President in October 2003 and to Executive Vice President in March 2005. Prior to joining Dollar General, Ms. Lanigan served as Senior Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary at Zale Corporation, a specialty retailer of fine jewelry, headquartered in Irving, Texas. During her six years with Zale, Ms. Lanigan held various positions, including Associate General Counsel. Prior to that, she held legal positions with both Turner Broadcasting System, Inc. and Troutman Sanders law firm.


Mr. O’Briant joined Dollar General in 1991 as Divisional Merchandise Manager.  Mr. O’Briant was named General Merchandise Manager in 1992, Vice President, Merchandising in 1995, Senior Vice President, Merchandising and MIS in 1998, Executive Vice President in 2000, and Executive Vice President, Operations in February 2001. He assumed his current position as Executive Vice President, Merchandising, Marketing and Strategic Planning in August 2003. Before joining Dollar General, Mr. O’Briant spent 17 years with Fred’s, Inc., a discount retailer, where he served in a number of executive management positions, including Vice President, Hardlines, Vice President, Softlines, and Vice President, Household Goods. He also owned his own business, O’Briant Enterprises, Inc. from 1989 to 1991, specializing in the service sector serving retail and wholesale customers and the military.


Mr. Davis joined Dollar General as Senior Vice President, Supply Chain Operations in January 2005. From 1999 until 2004, he served as the Vice President of Global Logistics for Reebok International Limited, a global company that designs and markets sports and fitness products, where he was directly responsible for all company-managed distribution centers worldwide. He also served as the Vice President of North American Distribution for Reebok International Limited from March 1999 until July 1999. Prior to his service at Reebok, he served as the Senior Vice President of Distribution (1998-1999) of Tropical Sportswear International, a leading producer and marketer of high quality casual and dress apparel principally for men, and as the Vice President of Logistics (1995-1998) and in various manufacturing positions (1978-1995) of Haggar Clothing Co., a subsidiary of Haggar Corp. which designs, manufactures, imports and markets casual and dress men’s and women’s apparel products, where he managed manufacturing and distribution facilities and oversaw the company-owned fleet.




13






Mr. Lewis joined Dollar General as Vice President and Controller in October 2001.  He was promoted to Senior Vice President in August 2004. From May 1999 through September 2001, Mr. Lewis served as Group Vice President, overseeing operational, planning and administrative functions for Lux Corp., a now-defunct apparel retailer that conducted business as “Mr. Rags” and was a then wholly-owned subsidiary of Claire’s Stores, Inc. Mr. Lewis served as Vice President of Finance from February 1996 until May 1999, and as Controller from November 1988 until May 1999, for Claire’s Stores, Inc., an international retailer of value-priced costume jewelry and accessories. Prior to joining Claire’s Stores, Mr. Lewis was employed with Arthur Andersen & Co.


Mr. Rice began his career with Dollar General in June 1981 as a part-time summer employee in the Scottsville, Kentucky Distribution Center. In May 1984, he began working full-time as the first writer and editor of Dollar General’s employee newsletter. Upon graduation from college, Mr. Rice served as assistant to the Vice President of Human Resources for one year. Over the next nine years, Mr. Rice served in various positions in human resources at Dollar General, including Corporate Recruiter, Scottsville DC and Office HR Manager, and Corporate Personnel Manager, before being promoted to Director of Human Resources in 1996. Mr. Rice was promoted to Senior Director, Human Resources in 1999 and then to his current position as Vice President, Human Resources in September 2002.


PART II


ITEM 5.

MARKET FOR REGISTRANT’S COMMON EQUITY, RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS AND ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES


The Company’s common stock is traded on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “DG.”  The following table sets forth the range of the high and low sales prices of the Company’s common stock during each quarter in 2004 and 2003, as reported on the New York Stock Exchange, together with dividends.  

2004

 

First
Quarter

 

Second
Quarter

 

Third
Quarter

 

Fourth
Quarter

High

 

$

23.19

   

$

20.60

   

$

20.94

   

$

21.29

 

Low

 

$

18.07

   

$

16.91

   

$

17.69

   

$

19.04

 

Dividends

 

$

.040

   

$

.040

   

$

.040

   

$

.040

 
                                 

2003

 

First
Quarter

 

Second
Quarter

 

Third
Quarter

 

Fourth
Quarter

High

 

$

15.20

   

$

19.75

   

$

23.40

   

$

22.67

 

Low

 

$

9.50

   

$

14.87

   

$

18.16

   

$

18.41

 

Dividends

 

$

.035

   

$

.035

   

$

.035

   

$

.035

 


The Company’s stock price at the close of the market on April 4, 2005, was $21.71.



14






There were approximately 12,639 shareholders of record of the Company’s common stock as of April 4, 2005. The Company has paid cash dividends on its common stock since 1975.  The Board of Directors regularly reviews the Company’s dividend plans to ensure that they are consistent with the Company’s earnings performance, financial condition, need for capital and other relevant factors.  Consistent with that review, the Board of Directors authorized dividends of $0.04 per share for each quarter of 2004.

The following table sets forth information with respect to purchases of shares of the Company’s common stock made during the quarter ended January 28, 2005 by or on behalf of the Company or any “affiliated purchaser,” as defined by Rule 10b-18(a)(3) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934:


 

Period

 

Total Number
of Shares Purchased (a)

 

Average Price Paid per Share

 

Total Number
of Shares Purchased as Part of Publicly Announced Plans or Programs (b)

 

Maximum Number of Shares that May Yet Be Purchased Under the Plans or Programs (b)

 
   

10/30/04-11/30/04

 

--

   

--

   

-- 

   

10,000,380

   
   

12/01/04-12/31/04

 

232,192

   

$20.10

   

203,900 

   

9,796,480

   
   

01/01/05-01/28/05

 

336,335

   

$20.41

   

335,600 

   

9,460,880

   
   

Total

 

568,527

   

$20.28

   

539,500 

   

9,460,880

   


(a)  Includes 29,027 shares purchased in open market transactions in satisfaction of the Company’s obligations under certain employee benefit plans.


(b)  On March 13, 2003, the Company announced that its Board of Directors had authorized the Company to repurchase up to 12 million shares of the Company’s outstanding common stock.  That repurchase authorization expired on March 13, 2005.  In addition, on November 30, 2004, the Company’s Board of Directors approved an additional share repurchase program of 10 million shares.  That repurchase authorization expires on November 30, 2005.  Under both authorizations, purchases may be made in the open market or in privately negotiated transactions from time to time subject to market conditions.  See “Liquidity and Capital Resources” in Item 7 below.




15






 ITEM 6.

SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA


The following table sets forth selected consolidated financial information for each of the five most recent fiscal years.  This information should be read in conjunction with the Consolidated Financial Statements and Notes thereto, included in Item 8 of this report, and Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations, included in Item 7 of this report.


(In thousands except per share and operating data)

 

January 28,

2005

 

January 30,

2004 (c)

 

January 31,

2003 (c)

 

February 1,

2002 (c)

 

February 2,

2001 (c)(d)

SUMMARY OF OPERATIONS:

                           

Net sales

$

7,660,927 

 

$

6,871,992 

 

$

6,100,404 

 

$

5,322,895 

 

$

4,550,571 

Gross profit

$

2,263,192 

 

$

2,018,129 

 

$

1,724,266 

 

$

1,509,412 

 

$

1,250,903 

Penalty expense and litigation settlement expense (proceeds)

$

– 

 

$

10,000 

 

$

(29,541)

 

$

– 

 

$

162,000 

Income before income taxes

$

534,757 

 

$

476,523 

 

$

410,337 

 

$

322,174 

 

$

102,202 

Net income

$

344,190 

 

$

299,002 

 

$

262,351 

 

$

203,874 

 

$

66,955 

Net income as a % of sales

 

4.5% 

   

4.4% 

   

4.3% 

   

3.8% 

   

1.5% 

                             

PER SHARE RESULTS (a):

                           

Basic earnings per share

$

1.04 

 

$

0.89 

 

$

0.79 

 

$

0.61 

 

$

0.20 

Diluted earnings per share

$

1.04 

 

$

0.89 

 

$

0.78 

 

$

0.61 

 

$

0.20 

Cash dividends per share of common stock

$

0.16 

 

$

0.14 

 

$

0.13 

 

$

0.13 

 

$

0.12 

Weighted average diluted shares

 

332,068 

   

337,636 

   

335,050 

   

335,017 

   

333,858 

                             

FINANCIAL POSITION:

                           

Assets

$

2,841,004 

 

$

2,621,117 

 

$

2,303,619 

 

$

2,526,481 

 

$

2,271,217 

Long-term obligations

$

258,462 

 

$

265,337 

 

$

330,337 

 

$

339,470 

 

$

720,764 

Shareholders’ equity

$

1,684,465 

 

$

1,554,299 

 

$

1,267,445 

 

$

1,023,690 

 

$

847,374 

Return on average assets (b)

 

12.7% 

   

12.3% 

   

10.9% 

   

8.6% 

   

3.2% 

Return on average equity (b)

 

22.1% 

   

21.4% 

   

23.2% 

   

22.2% 

   

8.0% 

                             

OPERATING DATA:

                           

Retail stores at end of period

 

7,320 

   

6,700 

   

6,113 

   

5,540 

   

5,000 

Year-end selling square feet

 

50,015,000 

   

45,354,000 

   

41,201,000 

   

37,421,000 

   

33,871,000 

Highly consumable sales

 

63% 

   

61% 

   

60% 

   

58% 

   

55% 

Seasonal sales

 

17% 

   

17% 

   

17% 

   

17% 

   

16% 

Home products sales

 

11% 

   

13% 

   

13% 

   

14% 

   

17% 

Basic clothing sales

 

9% 

   

9% 

   

10% 

   

11% 

   

12% 

                             


(a)

As adjusted to give retroactive effect to all common stock splits.

(b)

Average assets or equity, as applicable, is calculated using the fiscal year-end balance and the four preceding fiscal quarter-end balances.

(c)

The Company restated its financial statements for fiscal years 2000 through 2003 as discussed in Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for the year ended January 28, 2005, included in Item 8 of this report. For fiscal years 2001 and 2000, the Restatement reduced previously reported net income by approximately $3.6 million and $3.7 million, respectively, or approximately $.01 per diluted share in each year.

(d)

53-week year.



16






ITEM 7.

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS


General

Accounting Periods .  The following text contains references to years 2005, 2004, 2003 and 2002, which represent fiscal years ending or ended February 3, 2006, January 28, 2005, January 30, 2004 and January 31, 2003, respectively. Fiscal year 2005 will be a 53-week accounting period while 2004, 2003 and 2002 were 52-week accounting periods. The Company’s fiscal year ends on the Friday closest to January 31. This discussion and analysis should be read with, and is qualified in its entirety by, the Consolidated Financial Statements and the notes thereto.

Executive Overview . Fiscal 2004 was a significant year of investment for the Company. Despite a difficult economic environment for its customers, the Company successfully implemented many of the important operating initiatives outlined in last year’s Form 10-K, while also achieving improved financial results.  The following are some of the more significant operating accomplishments during 2004:

·

The opening of 722 new stores, including stores in 3 additional states;

·

The addition of coolers (which allow the Company’s stores to carry perishable products) in the majority of stores, bringing the total number of stores with coolers to 6,755 at January 28, 2005. In addition, over 6,300 stores were certified and accepting electronic benefit transfers (“EBT”);

·

The rollout of automatic inventory replenishment to all stores, completed during the first quarter of 2004, and the related improvement of inventory in-stock levels;

·

The rollout of the acceptance of the Discover card and debit cards to all stores;

·

The design completion and initiation of implementation of the “EZstore” project, which is designed to improve many facets of inventory flow from distribution centers to consumers and other areas of store operations, including labor scheduling, hiring and training and product presentation;

·

The ongoing construction of the Company’s eighth distribution center in South Carolina and substantial completion of expansion projects in 2 other distribution facilities to increase overall distribution capacity;

·

The implementation of a merchandising data warehouse;

·

The increased store manager training and reduction of store manager turnover to under 50% in 2004.


In 2005, the Company will focus its efforts on accomplishing the following operating initiatives:

·

Opening 730 new Dollar General stores, including at least 30 new Dollar General Market stores, and continuing to look westward for further geographical expansion;

·

Continuing to invest in its EZstore project with the goal of rolling it out to half of its stores by the end of 2005;



17






·

Reducing inventory levels on a per-store basis by revisiting replenishment assumptions, safety stock levels needed in distribution centers and improving execution of selling through seasonal and other non-core merchandise;

·

Continuing to test Dollar General Market store formats and additional geographic areas for these stores;

·

Continuing to focus on hiring practices and instilling increased accountability among the Company’s employees;

·

Identifying a location for and commencing construction on a ninth distribution center for a planned opening during 2006.


The Company can provide no assurance that it will be successful in executing these initiatives, nor can the Company guarantee that the successful implementation of these initiatives will result in superior financial performance.


In addition to undertaking the operating initiatives described above, the Company also intends to focus on and evaluate the status of certain other issues. Those issues are likely to include:

·

The appropriate level of share repurchases for 2005 (in 2004 the Company spent $209.3 million repurchasing approximately 11 million shares);

·

The impact on the Company, if any, from recent or potential legislation affecting minimum wages;

·

The impact of increasing fuel costs;

·

The impact of increasing health care and workers’ compensation costs;

·

The progress of the wage and hour collective action litigation in the state of Alabama, discussed more fully in Note 8 to the Consolidated Financial Statements;

·

The Company’s rating agency debt ratings.


The Company measures itself against seven key financial metrics that it believes provide a well-balanced perspective regarding its overall financial health. These metrics, and their method of computation, are listed below:

·

Earnings per share (“EPS”) growth (current year EPS minus prior year EPS divided by prior year EPS equals percentage change), which is an indicator of the increased returns generated for the Company’s shareholders;

·

Total net sales growth (current year total net sales minus prior year total net sales divided by prior year total net sales equals percentage change), which indicates, among other things, the success of the Company’s selection of new store locations and merchandising strategies;

·

Operating margin rate (operating profit divided by net sales), which is an indicator of the Company’s success in leveraging its fixed costs and managing its variable costs;

·

Return on invested capital (numerator – net income plus interest expense, net of tax, plus rent expense, net of tax; denominator – average long-term debt plus average shareholders’ equity, both measured at the end of the latest five fiscal quarters, plus average rent expense multiplied by eight. Average rent expense is computed using a two-year period.).  Although this measure is a not computed using generally accepted



18






accounting principles (“GAAP”), the Company believes it is useful because return on invested capital measures the efficiency of the Company’s capital deployed in its operations;  

·

Free cash flow (the sum of net cash flows from operating activities, net cash flows from investing activities and net cash flows from financing activities, excluding share repurchases and changes in debt other than required payments). Although this measure is a non-GAAP measure, the Company believes it is useful as an indicator of the cash flow generating capacity of the Company’s operations. It is also a useful metric to analyze in conjunction with net income to determine whether there is any significant non-cash component to the Company’s net income;  

·

Inventory turns (cost of goods sold for the year divided by average inventory balances, at cost, measured at the end of the latest five fiscal quarters) which is an indicator of how well the Company is managing the largest asset on its balance sheet;

·

Return on average assets (net income for the year divided by average total assets, measured at the end of the latest five fiscal quarters), which is an overall indicator of the Company’s effectiveness in deploying its resources.


The Company computes the above metrics using both GAAP and certain non-GAAP information. As discussed further below under “Results of Operations”, the Company generally excludes items relating to the restatement of the Company’s 1998-2000 financial results (the “2001 Restatement”) to more effectively evaluate the Company’s performance on a comparable and ongoing basis.

The Company also pays particular attention to its same-store sales growth, which is a sub-category of its total sales growth, and its shrink performance, which is a sub-category of its operating margin rate. In 2004 and 2003, the Company experienced same-store sales growth of 3.2% and 4.0%, respectively. In 2004 and 2003, the Company’s shrink, expressed in retail dollars as a percentage of sales, was 3.05% for each year.

Results of Operations

The following discussion of the Company’s financial performance is based on the Consolidated Financial Statements set forth herein. The Company has included in this document certain financial information not derived in accordance with GAAP, such as selling, general and administrative (“SG&A”) expenses, net income and diluted earnings per share that exclude the impact of items relating to the 2001 Restatement.  The Company believes that this information is useful to investors as it indicates more clearly the Company’s comparative year-to-year operating results. This information should not be considered a substitute for any measures derived in accordance with GAAP. Management may use this information to better understand the Company’s underlying operating results.  Reconciliations of these non-GAAP measures to the most comparable measure calculated in accordance with GAAP are contained in the table below.

The Company has restated its consolidated financial statements, as discussed in Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, for all previous years presented (the “Restatement”).  The following discussion of the Company’s results of operations incorporates the effects of this Restatement.



19






For fiscal years 2001 and 2000, the Restatement reduced previously reported net income by approximately $3.6 million and $3.7 million, respectively, or approximately $.01 per diluted share in each year. Retained earnings at the beginning of 2000 have been reduced by approximately $10.7 million to reflect the after-tax impacts of earlier periods.


The following table contains results of operations data for the 2004, 2003 and 2002 fiscal years, the dollar and percentage variances among those years, and reconciliations of any non-GAAP measures to the most comparable measure calculated in accordance with GAAP.  




20







 (amounts in millions, excluding per share amounts)

   2004

  2003

  2002

2004 vs. 2003

2003 vs. 2002

$

change

 %

 change

$

change

%

change

   

(Restated)

(Restated)

 


 


Net sales by category:

       


 


Highly consumable

$ 4,825.1 

$ 4,206.9 

$ 3,674.9 

$ 618.2 

14.7%

$ 531.9 

14.5%

% of net sales

62.98%

61.22%

60.24%

 


 


Seasonal

1,264.0 

1,156.1 

994.3 

107.9 

9.3

161.9 

16.3

% of net sales

16.50%

16.82%

16.30%

 


 


Home products

879.5 

860.9 

808.5 

18.6 

2.2

52.3 

6.5

% of net sales

11.48%

12.53%

13.25%

 


 


Basic clothing

692.4 

648.1 

622.7 

44.3 

6.8

25.4 

4.1

% of net sales

9.04%

9.43%

10.21%

 


 


Net sales

$ 7,660.9 

$ 6,872.0 

$ 6,100.4 

$ 788.9 

11.5%

$ 771.6 

12.6%

Cost of goods sold

5,397.7 

4,853.9 

4,376.1 

543.9 

11.2

477.7 

10.9

% of net sales

70.46%

70.63%

71.74%

 


 


Gross profit

2,263.2 

2,018.1 

1,724.3 

245.1 

12.1

293.9 

17.0

% of net sales

29.54%

29.37%

28.26%

 


 


SG&A:

       


 


SG&A excluding 2001 Restatement-related expenses

  1,705.8 

1,499.5 

1,294.4 

206.3 

13.8

205.1 

15.8

% of net sales

22.27%

21.82%

21.22%

 


 


2001 Restatement-related expenses included in SG&A

0.5 

0.6 

6.4 

(0.1)

(23.5)

(5.8)

(90.8)

% of net sales

0.01%

0.01%

0.10%

 


 


Total SG&A

1,706.2 

1,500.1 

1,300.8 

206.1 

13.7

199.3 

15.3

% of net sales

22.27%

21.83%

21.32%

 


 


Penalty expense and litigation settlement proceeds

10.0 

(29.5)

(10.0)

(100.0)

39.5 

-

% of net sales

-  

0.15%

(0.48)%

 


 


Operating profit

557.0 

508.0 

453.0 

49.0 

9.6

55.0 

12.2

% of net sales

7.27%

7.39%

7.43%

 


 


Interest income

(6.6)

(4.1)

(4.3)

(2.5)

60.2

0.2 

(4.7)

% of net sales

(0.09)%

(0.06)%

(0.07)%

 


 


Interest expense

28.8 

35.6 

46.9 

(6.8)

(19.1)

(11.3)

(24.2)

% of net sales

0.38%

0.52%

0.77%

 


 


Income before income taxes

534.8 

476.5 

410.3 

58.2 

12.2

66.2 

16.1

% of net sales

6.98%

6.93%

6.73%

 


 


Income taxes

190.6 

177.5 

148.0 

13.0 

7.3

29.5 

20.0

% of net sales

2.49%

2.58%

2.43%

 


 


Net income

$ 344.2 

$ 299.0 

$ 262.4 

$ 45.2 

15.1

$ 36.7 

14.0

% of net sales

4.49%

4.35%

4.30%

 


 


         


 


Diluted earnings per share

$ 1.04 

$ 0.89 

$ 0.78 

$ 0.15 

16.9%

$ 0.11 

14.1%

Weighted average diluted shares

332.1 

337.6 

335.1 

(5.6)

(1.6)

2.6 

0.8

         


 


2001 Restatement-related items:

       


 


Penalty expense and litigation settlement proceeds

10.0 

(29.5)

(10.0)

(100.0)

39.5 

-

2001 Restatement-related expenses included in SG&A

0.5 

0.6 

6.4 

(0.1)

(23.5)

(5.8)

(90.8)

 

0.5 

10.6 

(23.1)

(10.1)

(95.7)

33.7 

-

Tax effect

(0.2)

(0.2)

9.1 

0.1 

(23.7)

(9.3)

-

Total 2001 Restatement-related items, net of tax

0.3 

10.4 

(14.1)

(10.1)

(97.3)

24.4 

-

Net income, excluding 2001 Restatement-related items

$ 344.5 

$ 309.4 

$ 248.3 

$ 35.1 

11.3

$ 61.1 

24.6

Diluted earnings per share, excluding 2001 Restatement-related items

$ 1.04 

$ 0.92 

$ 0.74 

$ 0.12 

13.0%

$ 0.18 

24.3%



21






Net Sales .  Increases in net sales resulted primarily from opening additional stores, including 620 net new stores in 2004, and a same-store sales increase of 3.2% for 2004 compared to 2003. Same-store sales calculations for a given period include only those stores that were open both at the end of that period and at the beginning of the preceding fiscal year. The increase in same-store sales accounted for $204.0 million of the increase in sales while stores opened since the beginning of 2003 were the primary contributors to the remaining $585.0 million sales increase during 2004. The increase in same-store sales is primarily attributable to an increase in the number of customer transactions.


The Company monitors its sales internally by the four major categories noted in the table above. The Company’s merchandising mix in recent years has shifted to faster-turning consumable products versus home products and clothing. This has been driven by customer wants and needs in the marketplace. As a result, over the past three years the highly consumable category has become a greater percentage of the Company’s overall sales mix while the percentages of the home products and basic clothing categories have declined. Accordingly, the Company’s sales increase by merchandise category in 2004 compared to 2003 was primarily attributable to the highly consumable category, which increased by $618.2 million, or 14.7%. The Company continually reviews its merchandise mix and adjusts it when deemed necessary as a part of its ongoing efforts to improve overall sales and gross profit. These ongoing reviews may result in a shift in the Company’s merchandising strategy which could increase permanent markdowns in the future.


The Company’s sales increase in 2003 compared to 2002 resulted primarily from opening additional stores, including 587 net new stores in 2003, and a same-store sales increase of 4.0% for 2003 compared to 2002. The increase in same-store sales accounted for $228.3 million of the increase in sales while stores opened since the beginning of 2003 were the primary contributors to the remaining $543.3 million sales increase during 2003. The Company’s sales increase by merchandise category in 2003 compared to 2002 was primarily attributable to the seasonal category, which increased by $161.9 million, or 16.3%, and the highly consumable category, which increased by $531.9 million, or 14.5%.


Gross Profit .  The gross profit rate increased 17 basis points in 2004 as compared with 2003. Although the Company’s margin rate is pressured by sales mix shifts to more highly consumable items, which typically carry lower gross profit rates, the Company has been able to more than offset this through increases in gross markups on all merchandise categories. More specific factors include the following:

·

Higher initial mark-ups on merchandise received during 2004 as compared with 2003 (approximately 32 basis points of gross margin improvement). This improvement was achieved primarily from the positive impact of opportunistic purchasing, renegotiating product costs with several key suppliers, selective price increases, and an increase in various performance-based vendor rebates.

·

Higher average mark-ups on the Company’s beginning inventory in 2004 as compared to 2003 (approximately 20 basis points of gross margin improvement). This increased average mark-up represents the cumulative impact of higher margin purchases over time.



22






These components of margin, which both positively impacted the Company’s results, were partially offset by:


·

An increase in transportation expenses as a percentage of sales (approximately 23 basis points of gross margin decline). This increase resulted primarily from higher fuel costs in 2004 as compared to 2003.

·

A nonrecurring favorable inventory adjustment in 2003 representing a change in the Company’s estimated provision for shrinkage (approximately 6 basis points of gross margin decline).


The gross profit rate increased 111 basis points in 2003 as compared with 2002 primarily due to the following:

·

Higher initial mark-ups on merchandise received during 2003 as compared with 2002 (approximately 59 basis points of gross margin improvement). This improvement was achieved primarily from increased purchases of higher margin seasonal and home product items; a 31% increase in imported purchases, which carry higher than average mark-ups; and a 72% increase in various performance-based vendor rebates.

·

A reduction in the Company’s shrink provision from 3.52% in 2002 to 3.05% in 2003, calculated using retail dollars as a percentage of sales (approximately 41 basis points of gross margin improvement, at cost).  The Company made progress in reducing the shrink at problem stores during 2003 but generally fell short of corporate goals.

·

Higher average mark-ups on the Company’s beginning inventory in 2003 as compared to 2002 (approximately 18 basis points of gross margin improvement). This increased average mark-up represents the cumulative impact of higher margin purchases over time.

·

A reduction in transportation expenses as a percentage of sales (approximately 14 basis points of gross margin improvement). This reduction resulted primarily from system enhancements and improved process efficiencies in managing outbound freight costs, which contributed to an approximate 7% decline in outbound cost per carton delivered in 2003 as compared to 2002.


These components of margin, which all positively impacted the Company’s results, were partially offset by:


·

The impact of the Company’s LIFO valuation adjustments in the fourth quarters of 2003 versus 2002 (approximately 16 basis points of gross margin decline). In 2002, the Company recorded an $8.9 million LIFO adjustment, which had the effect of increasing gross margin and primarily resulted from the Company’s ability to lower its product costs through effective purchasing methods and the general lack of inflation during the period. The Company did not benefit from a comparable adjustment in 2003 primarily because the LIFO reserves in certain inventory departments had been reduced to nominal amounts, or zero, in 2002 or prior years.  

·

An increase in markdowns of 14 basis points.  The increase in markdowns was due principally to increased Christmas-related markdowns compared to those the



23






Company had taken in the past and, to a lesser extent, markdowns taken to assist with the sale of both discontinued and slower moving apparel items.


Selling, General and Administrative (“SG&A”) Expense .  The increase in SG&A expense as a percentage of sales in 2004 as compared with 2003 was due to a number of factors, including but not limited to increases in the following expense categories that were in excess of the 11.5 percent increase in sales: store occupancy costs (increased 17.4%) primarily due to rising average monthly rentals associated with the Company’s leased store locations; an increase in purchased services (increased 54.6%) due primarily to fees associated with the increased customer usage of debit cards; professional fees (increased 119.2%) primarily due to consulting fees associated with both the Company’s 2004 EZstore project and compliance with certain provisions of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002; and increased costs for inventory services (increased 88.2%) due to both an increased number of physical inventories and a higher average cost per physical inventory. Partially offsetting these increases was a reduction in accruals for employee bonus expenses (declined 21.3%) primarily related to higher bonus expense in 2003 related to the Company’s financial performance during 2003.

The increase in SG&A expense as a percentage of sales, excluding expenses relating to the 2001 Restatement (primarily professional fees), in 2003 as compared with 2002 was due to a number of factors, including but not limited to increases in the following expense categories that were in excess of the 12.6 percentage increase in sales: store labor (increased 14.6%) primarily due to increases in store training-related costs; the cost of workers’ compensation and other insurance programs (increased 29.8%) primarily due to an increase in medical inflation costs experienced by the Company compared to previous years; store occupancy costs (increased 16.0%) primarily due to rising average monthly rentals associated with the Company’s leased store locations; and higher bonus expense (increased 34.4%) related to the Company’s financial performance during 2003.

Penalty Expense and Litigation Settlement Proceeds .  As more fully discussed in Note 8 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, the Company accrued $10.0 million in 2003 with respect to a civil penalty related to its agreement in principle with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) staff to settle the matters arising out of the Company’s 2001 Restatement.  In 2002, the Company recorded $29.5 million in net litigation settlement proceeds, which amount included $29.7 million in insurance proceeds associated with the settlement of class action and shareholder derivative litigation, offset by a $0.2 million settlement of a shareholder class action opt-out claim, all of which related to the 2001 Restatement.

Interest Expense . The decrease in interest expense in 2004 compared to 2003 is due primarily to capitalized interest of $3.6 million related to the Company’s DC construction and expansion projects in 2004 compared to $0.2 million in 2003 and a reduction in amortization of debt issuance costs of $2.2 million due in part to the amendment of the Company’s revolving credit facility in June 2004. The decrease in interest expense in 2003 as compared to 2002 is due primarily to debt reduction achieved during 2003. The average daily total debt outstanding over the past three years was as follows: 2004 - $280.1 million at an average interest rate of 8.5%; 2003 - $301.5 million at an average interest rate of 8.6%; and 2002 - $575.7 million at an average interest rate of 6.6%. The increase in the Company’s average interest rate from 2002 to



24






2003 is due primarily to the reduction of variable rate debt. All of the Company’s outstanding indebtedness at January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004 was fixed rate debt.

Income Taxes .  The effective income tax rates for 2004, 2003 and 2002 were 35.6%, 37.3% and 36.1%, respectively. The 2004 rate was lower than the 2003 rate primarily due to a net reduction in certain contingent income tax liabilities of approximately $6.2 million recognized in the second quarter of 2004, when the Company adjusted its tax contingency reserve as the result of two state income tax examinations. The tax rate in 2003 was negatively impacted by the $10.0 million penalty expense in 2003, as discussed above, which was not deductible for income tax purposes.  The lower effective tax rate in 2002 was primarily due to the favorable resolution of certain state tax related items during 2002.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

Current Financial Condition / Recent Developments . During the past three years, the Company has generated an aggregate of approximately $1.33 billion in cash flows from operating activities. During that period, the Company has expanded the number of stores it operates by 32% (1,780 stores) and has incurred approximately $566 million in capital expenditures, primarily to support this growth. Also during this three-year period, the Company has reduced its long-term debt by approximately $464 million and has expended approximately $239 million for repurchases of its common stock.

The Company’s inventory balance represented approximately 48% of its total assets as of January 28, 2005. The Company’s proficiency in managing its inventory balances can have a significant impact on the Company’s cash flows from operations during a given fiscal year. For example, in 2004, changes in inventory balances represented a $219.4 million use of cash, as explained in more detail below, while in 2002, changes in inventory balances represented an $8.0 million source of cash.  Inventory turns increased from 3.8 times in 2002 to 4.0 times in both 2003 and 2004.

As described in Note 8 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, the Company is involved in a number of legal actions and claims, some of which could potentially result in material cash payments.  Adverse developments in those actions could materially and adversely affect the Company’s liquidity.  The Company also has certain income tax-related contingencies as more fully described below under “Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates”. Estimates of these contingent liabilities are included in the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements. However, future negative developments could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s liquidity. See Notes 5 and 8 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

On November 30, 2004, the Board of Directors authorized the Company to repurchase up to 10 million shares of its outstanding common stock in the open market or in privately negotiated transactions from time to time subject to market conditions. The objective of the share repurchase program is to enhance shareholder value by purchasing shares at a price that produces a return on investment that is greater than the Company's cost of capital. Additionally, share repurchases will be undertaken only if such purchases result in an accretive impact on the Company's fully diluted earnings per share calculation.  This authorization expires November 30,



25






2005. During 2004, the Company purchased approximately 0.5 million shares pursuant to this authorization at a total cost of $10.9 million.


On March 13, 2003, the Board of Directors authorized the Company to repurchase up to 12 million shares of its outstanding common stock, with provisions and objectives similar to the November 30, 2004 authorization discussed above. This authorization expired March 13, 2005. During 2003, the Company purchased approximately 1.5 million shares at a total cost of $29.7 million. During 2004, the Company purchased approximately 10.5 million shares at a total cost of $198.4 million. As of January 28, 2005, approximately 12.0 million shares had been purchased, substantially completing this share repurchase authorization. Share repurchases in 2004 increased diluted earnings per share by approximately $0.02.


The following table summarizes the Company’s significant contractual obligations as of January 28, 2005 (in thousands):


 

Payments Due by Period

Contractual obligations

Total

 

< 1 yr

 

1-3 yrs

 

3-5 yrs

 

> 5 yrs

Long-term debt (a)

$

200,000

   

$

-

   

$

-

   

$

-

   

$

200,000

 

Capital lease obligations

 

28,178

     

12,021

     

9,502

     

3,188

     

3,467

 

Financing obligations

 

91,555

     

1,886

     

4,628

     

4,943

     

80,098

 

Inventory purchase obligations

 

98,767

     

98,767

     

-

     

-

     

-

 

Interest (b)

 

193,822

     

26,592

     

50,660

     

48,720

     

67,850

 

Operating leases

 

1,165,045

     

251,462

     

369,636

     

220,869

     

323,078

 

Total contractual cash obligations

$

1,777,367

   

$

390,728

   

$

434,426

   

$

277,720

   

$

674,493

 
                                       

(a)

As discussed below, represents unsecured notes whose holders have a redemption option in 2005, which could result in the accelerated payment of all or a portion of these obligations.

(b)

Represents obligations for interest payments on long-term debt, capital lease and financing obligations.


The Company has a $250 million revolving credit facility (the “Credit Facility”), which expires in June 2009. As of January 28, 2005, the Company had no outstanding borrowings and $8.7 million of standby letters of credit outstanding under the Credit Facility. The standby letters of credit reduce the borrowing capacity of the Credit Facility. The Credit Facility contains certain financial covenants, all of which the Company was in compliance with at January 28, 2005. See Note 6 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for further discussion of the Credit Facility.


The Company has $200 million (principal amount) of 8 5/8% unsecured notes due June 15, 2010. This indebtedness was incurred to assist in funding the Company’s growth. Interest on the notes is payable semi-annually on June 15 and December 15 of each year.  The note holders may elect to have these notes repaid on June 15, 2005, at 100% of the principal amount plus accrued and unpaid interest. Although the holders of these notes have the ability to require the Company to repurchase the notes in June 2005, the Company has classified this debt as long-term due to its intent and ability, in the event it were required to repurchase any portion of the notes, to refinance this indebtedness on a long-term basis, including through borrowings under the Credit Facility. The Company may seek, from time to time, to retire the notes through cash purchases on the open market, in privately negotiated transactions or otherwise. Such repurchases, if any, will depend on prevailing market conditions, the Company’s liquidity requirements, contractual restrictions and other factors. The amounts involved may be material.




26






Significant terms of the Company’s outstanding debt obligations could have an effect on the Company’s ability to incur additional debt financing.  The Credit Facility contains financial covenants, which include limits on certain debt to cash flow ratios, a fixed charge coverage test, and minimum allowable consolidated net worth.  The Credit Facility also places certain specified limitations on secured and unsecured debt.  The Company’s outstanding notes discussed above place certain specified limitations on secured debt and place certain limitations on the Company’s ability to execute sale-leaseback transactions. The Company has generated significant cash flows from its operations during recent years. The Company had peak borrowings under the Credit Facility of $73.1 million during 2004, all of which were repaid prior to January 28, 2005, and had no borrowings outstanding under the Credit Facility at any time during 2003. Therefore, the Company does not believe that any existing limitations on its ability to incur additional indebtedness will have a material impact on its liquidity. Notes 6 and 8 to the Consolidated Financial Statements contain additional disclosures related to the Company’s debt and financing obligations.

At January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, the Company had commercial letter of credit facilities totaling $215.0 million and $218.0 million, respectively, of which $98.8 million and $111.7 million, respectively, were outstanding for the funding of imported merchandise purchases.

The Company believes that its existing cash and short-term investments balances (totaling $275.8 million at January 28, 2005), cash flows from operations ($389.7 million generated in 2004), the Credit Facility ($241.3 million available at January 28, 2005) and its anticipated ongoing access to the capital markets, if necessary, will provide sufficient financing to meet the Company’s currently foreseeable liquidity and capital resource needs.

Cash flows provided by operating activities .  Cash flows from operating activities for 2004 compared to 2003 declined by $124.0 million. The most significant component of the change in cash flows from operating activities was an increase in inventory levels in 2004. Total merchandise inventories at the end of 2004 were $1.38 billion compared to $1.16 billion at the end of 2003, a 19 percent increase, or a 9 percent increase on a per store basis, with the remainder primarily attributable to growth in the number of stores. The largest portion of the increase in inventories resulted from the Company’s focus on improving in-stock levels of core merchandise at the stores. New initiatives, including the expansion of the perishable food program and the addition of certain core apparel items, magazines and Hispanic food items also contributed to the inventory increase.  In addition, due to an early Easter in 2005, the Company received more seasonal merchandise for Spring 2005 before the end of fiscal 2004. In 2005, the Company plans to focus on lowering its per store inventory levels. Cash flows in 2004 increased by $45.3 million over 2003 related to changes in income taxes payable, primarily due to a large payment of federal income taxes for 2002 that was made in 2003. Cash flows in the 2004 period were positively impacted by an increase in net income of $45.2 million driven by improved operating results (as more fully discussed above under “Results of Operations”).

Cash flows from operations increased by $91.4 million for 2003 compared to 2002. In 2002, the Company paid $162.0 million in settlement of the class action lawsuit relating to the 2001 Restatement, as discussed in Note 8 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, which did not recur in 2003. Partially offsetting this cash outflow were 2002 tax benefits totaling



27






approximately $139.3 million, of which approximately $121.0 million either directly or indirectly related to the Company’s 2001 Restatement and subsequent litigation settlement.  The timing of these tax benefits was a significant component of the reduction of cash flows from deferred ($62.6 million) and current ($77.9 million) income taxes in 2003 compared to 2002. An increase in accrued liabilities resulted in a $45.3 million increase in 2003 cash flows compared to 2002 due in part to the accrued SEC penalty and increased 2003 bonuses described above, increased deferred compensation liabilities and increases in certain tax reserves.  Contributing to the increase in cash flows provided by operating activities in 2003 was an increase in net income of $36.7 million driven by the improved operating results discussed above (see “Results of Operations”).

Cash flows used in investing activities . Significant components of the Company’s purchases of property and equipment in 2004 included the following approximate amounts: $101 million for distribution and transportation-related capital expenditures; $82 million for new stores; $26 million for certain fixtures in existing stores; $26 million for various systems-related capital projects; and $23 million for coolers in existing stores, which allow the stores to carry refrigerated products. During 2004, the Company opened 722 new stores and relocated or remodeled 80 stores. Distribution and transportation expenditures in 2004 included costs associated with the construction of the Company’s new DC in South Carolina as well as costs associated with the expansion of the Ardmore, Oklahoma and South Boston, Virginia DCs.

Net sales of short-term investments in 2004 of $25.8 million primarily reflect the Company’s investment activities in tax-exempt auction market securities.

The Company’s purchases of property and equipment in 2003 included the following approximate amounts: $63 million for new, relocated and remodeled stores; $22 million for systems-related capital projects; and $25 million for distribution and transportation-related capital expenditures. During 2003, the Company opened 673 new stores and relocated or remodeled 76 stores. Systems-related projects in 2003 included approximately $6 million for point-of-sale and satellite technology and $3 million related to debit/credit/EBT technology. Distribution and transportation expenditures in 2003 included approximately $19 million at the Ardmore, Oklahoma and South Boston, Virginia DCs primarily related to the ongoing expansion of those facilities.

Net purchases of short-term investments in 2003 of $67.2 million primarily reflect the Company’s investment activities in tax-exempt auction market securities.

During 2003, the Company purchased two secured promissory notes totaling $49.6 million which represent debt issued by a third party entity from which the Company leases its DC in South Boston, Virginia.  See Note 8 to the Company’s Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Company’s purchases of property and equipment in 2002 included the following approximate amounts: $51 million for new, relocated and remodeled stores; $30 million for systems-related capital projects; and $21 million for distribution and transportation-related capital expenditures. The Company opened 622 new stores and relocated or remodeled 73 stores in 2002.  Systems-related capital projects in 2002 included approximately $15 million for satellite technology and $3 million for point-of-sale cash registers.  Expenditures for distribution



28






and transportation consisted in part of $8 million for the purchase of new trailers and $5 million related to the installation of a dual sortation system in the Fulton, Missouri DC.

Capital expenditures during 2005 are projected to be approximately $350 million.  The Company anticipates funding its 2005 capital requirements with cash flows from operations and the Credit Facility, if necessary. Significant components of the 2005 capital plan include the completion of construction of the new DC in South Carolina and the expected commencement of construction of the Company’s ninth DC at an as-yet undetermined location; leasehold improvements and fixtures and equipment for 730 new stores, which includes 30 new Dollar General Market stores; the continued rollout of the Company’s EZstore project; and additional investments in technology and systems.  The Company plans to undertake these expenditures in order to improve its infrastructure and provide support for its anticipated growth.

Cash flows used in financing activities .  During 2004, the Company repurchased approximately 11.0 million shares of its common stock at a total cost of $209.3 million and paid cash dividends of $52.7 million, or $0.16 per share, on its outstanding common stock. The Company paid cash dividends of $46.9 million, or $0.14 per share, on its outstanding common stock during 2003. The Company repurchased approximately 1.5 million shares of its common stock during 2003 at a total cost of $29.7 million. The Company expended $15.9 million during 2003 to reduce its outstanding capital lease and financing obligations. These uses of cash were partially offset by proceeds from the exercise of stock options during 2004 and 2003 of $34.1 million and $49.5 million, respectively. The use of cash in 2002 primarily reflects the net repayment of $397.1 million in outstanding debt and the payment of $42.6 million of cash dividends.  The net repayment of debt in 2002 was undertaken to strengthen the Company’s financial position and was accomplished by utilizing cash flow from operations and existing cash balances.


Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates


The preparation of financial statements in accordance with GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect reported amounts and related disclosures. Management considers an accounting estimate to be critical if:


·

it requires assumptions to be made that were uncertain at the time the estimate was made; and

·

changes in the estimate or different estimates that could have been selected could have a material effect on the Company’s results of operations or financial condition.


Management has discussed the development and selection of its critical accounting estimates with the Audit Committee of the Company’s Board of Directors and the Audit Committee has reviewed the disclosures presented below relating to them.


In addition to the estimates presented below, there are other items within the Company’s financial statements that require estimation, but are not deemed critical as defined above. The Company believes these estimates are reasonable and appropriate. However, if actual experience differs from the assumptions and other considerations used, the resulting changes could have a material effect on the financial statements taken as a whole.



29







Merchandise Inventories. Merchandise inventories are stated at the lower of cost or market with cost determined using the retail last-in, first-out (“LIFO”) method.  Under the Company’s retail inventory method (“RIM”), the calculation of gross profit and the resulting valuation of inventories at cost are computed by applying a calculated cost-to-retail inventory ratio to the retail value of sales.  The RIM is an averaging method that has been widely used in the retail industry due to its practicality.  Also, it is recognized that the use of the RIM will result in valuing inventories at the lower of cost or market if markdowns are currently taken as a reduction of the retail value of inventories.


Inherent in the RIM calculation are certain significant management judgments and estimates including, among others, initial markups, markdowns, and shrinkage, which significantly impact the gross profit calculation as well as the ending inventory valuation at cost. These significant estimates, coupled with the fact that the RIM is an averaging process, can, under certain circumstances, produce distorted cost figures.  Factors that can lead to distortion in the calculation of the inventory balance include:


·

applying the RIM to a group of products that is not fairly uniform in terms of its cost and selling price relationship and turnover;


·

applying the RIM to transactions over a period of time that include different rates of gross profit, such as those relating to seasonal merchandise;


·

inaccurate estimates of inventory shrinkage between the date of the last physical inventory at a store and the financial statement date; and


·

inaccurate estimates of lower of cost or market (“LCM”) and/or LIFO reserves.


To reduce the potential of such distortions in the valuation of inventory, the Company’s RIM calculation through the end of 2004 utilized 10 departments in which fairly homogenous classes of merchandise inventories having similar gross margins were grouped.  In 2005, in order to further refine its RIM calculation, the Company expanded the number of departments it utilizes for its gross margin calculation from 10 to 23. The impact of this change on the Company’s future consolidated financial statements is not currently expected to be material to a given fiscal year, although a given quarter could be impacted based on the mix of sales in the quarter. Other factors that reduce potential distortion include the use of historical experience in estimating the shrink provision (see discussion below) and the utilization of an independent statistician to assist in the LIFO sampling process and index formulation. Also, on an ongoing basis, the Company reviews and evaluates the salability of its inventory and records LCM reserves, if necessary.


The Company calculates its shrink provision based on actual physical inventory results during the fiscal period and an accrual for estimated shrink occurring subsequent to a physical inventory through the end of the fiscal reporting period. This accrual is calculated as a percentage of sales and is determined by dividing the book-to-physical inventory adjustments recorded during the previous twelve months by the related sales for the same period for each store. Beginning in 2003, in an effort to improve this estimate, the Company began applying



30






store-specific shrink rates to store-specific sales generated subsequent to a given store’s physical inventory. In 2002, the Company applied a weighted-average shrink rate to all Company sales generated subsequent to physical inventories. To the extent that subsequent physical inventories yield different results than this estimated accrual, the Company’s effective shrink rate for a given reporting period will include the impact of adjusting the estimated results to the actual results. Although the Company performs physical inventories in all of its stores annually, the same stores do not necessarily get counted in the same reporting periods from year to year, which could impact comparability in a given reporting period.


During 2003, the Company implemented an item-level perpetual inventory system for financial reporting purposes. The new system provided better information regarding the type of inventory that the Company owned and improved the Company’s ability to estimate its shrink provision as discussed above. The utilization of this improved information in the Company’s RIM calculation resulted in a non-recurring inventory adjustment of approximately $7.8 million, which favorably impacted gross profit in the third quarter of 2003.


Property and Equipment.  Property and equipment are recorded at cost. The Company groups its assets into relatively homogeneous classes and generally provides for depreciation on a straight-line basis over the estimated average useful life of each asset class, except for leasehold improvements, which are amortized over the shorter of the applicable lease term or the estimated useful life of the asset. The valuation and classification of these assets and the assignment of useful depreciable lives involves significant judgments and the use of estimates. Property and equipment are reviewed for impairment periodically and whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value of an asset may not be recoverable.


Self-Insurance Liability.  The Company retains a significant portion of the risk for its workers’ compensation, employee health insurance, general liability, property loss and automobile coverage. These costs are significant primarily due to the large employee base and number of stores. Provisions are made to this insurance liability on an undiscounted basis based on actual claim data and estimates of incurred but not reported claims developed by an independent actuary utilizing historical claim trends. If future claim trends deviate from recent historical patterns, the Company may be required to record additional expenses or expense reductions, which could be material to the Company’s future financial results.


Contingent Liabilities – Income Taxes . The Company is subject to routine income tax audits that occur periodically in the normal course of business. The Company estimates its contingent income tax liabilities based on its assessment of probable income tax-related exposures and the anticipated settlement of those exposures translating into actual future liabilities. The contingent liabilities are estimated based on both historical audit experiences with various state and federal taxing authorities and the Company’s interpretation of current income tax-related trends. If the Company’s income tax contingent liability estimates prove to be inaccurate, the resulting adjustments could be material to the Company’s future financial results.


Contingent Liabilities - Legal Matters. The Company is subject to legal, regulatory and other proceedings and claims. Reserves, if any, are established for these claims and proceedings based upon the probability and estimability of losses and to fairly present, in conjunction with



31






the disclosures of these matters in the Company’s financial statements and SEC filings, management’s view of the Company’s exposure. The Company reviews outstanding claims and proceedings with external counsel to assess probability and estimates of loss.  These assessments are re-evaluated each quarter or as new information becomes available to determine whether a reserve should be established or if any existing reserve should be adjusted. The actual cost of resolving a claim or proceeding ultimately may be substantially different than the amount of the recorded reserve.  In addition, because it is not permissible under GAAP to establish a litigation reserve until the loss is both probable and estimable, in some cases there may be insufficient time to establish a reserve prior to the actual incurrence of the loss (upon verdict and judgment at trial, for example, or in the case of a quickly negotiated settlement). See Note 8 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.


Effects of Inflation

The Company believes that inflation and/or deflation had a minimal impact on its overall operations during 2004, 2003 and 2002.

Accounting Pronouncements

In December 2004, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 123R, “Share-Based Payment,” which will require all companies to measure compensation cost for all share-based payments (including employee stock options) at fair value. This new standard will be effective for public companies for interim or annual periods beginning after June 15, 2005. Companies can adopt the new standard in one of two ways: (i) the modified prospective application, in which a company would recognize share-based employee compensation cost from the beginning of the fiscal period in which the recognition provisions are first applied as if the fair-value-based accounting method had been used to account for all employee awards granted, modified, or settled after the effective date and to any awards that were not fully vested as of the effective date; or (ii) the modified retrospective application, in which a company would recognize employee compensation cost for periods presented prior to the adoption of SFAS No. 123R in accordance with the original provisions of SFAS No. 123 “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation,” pursuant to which an entity would recognize employee compensation cost in the amounts reported in the pro forma disclosures provided in accordance with SFAS No. 123. The Company expects to adopt SFAS No. 123R during the third quarter of 2005 using the modified prospective application, and expects to incur incremental SG&A expense associated with the adoption of approximately $4 million to $8 million in 2005. See Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for disclosure of the pro forma effects of stock option grants as determined using the methodology prescribed under SFAS No. 123.


Forward Looking Statements / Risk Factors

Except for specific historical information, many of the matters discussed in this report and in the documents incorporated by reference into this report may express or imply projections of revenues or expenditures, statements of plans and objectives for future operations, growth or initiatives, statements of future economic performance, or statements regarding the outcome or impact of pending or threatened litigation. These and similar statements regarding events or



32






results which the Company expects will or may occur in the future are forward-looking statements concerning matters that involve risks, uncertainties and other factors which may cause the actual performance of the Company to differ materially from those expressed or implied by these statements.  All forward-looking information should be evaluated in the context of these risks, uncertainties and other factors. The words “believe,” “anticipate,” “project,” “plan,” “expect,” “estimate,” “objective,” “forecast,” “goal,” “intend,” “will likely result,” or “will continue” and similar expressions generally identify forward-looking statements. The Company believes the assumptions underlying these forward-looking statements are reasonable; however, any of the assumptions could be inaccurate, and therefore, actual results may differ materially from those projected in the forward-looking statements.  Factors and risks that may result in actual results differing from such forward-looking information include, but are not limited to those listed below, as well as other factors discussed throughout this document, including without limitation the factors described under “Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates.”

The Company’s business is moderately seasonal with the highest sales occurring during the fourth quarter. Adverse events during the fourth quarter could, therefore, affect the Company’s financial statements as a whole .  The Company realizes a significant portion of its net sales and net income during the holiday selling season.  In anticipation of the holidays, the Company purchases substantial amounts of seasonal inventory and hires many temporary employees.  If for any reason the Company’s net sales during the holiday selling season were to fall below seasonal norms, a seasonal merchandise inventory imbalance could result.  If such an imbalance were to occur, markdowns might be required to minimize this imbalance.  The Company’s profitability and operating results could be adversely affected by unanticipated markdowns.  

Adverse weather conditions or other disruptions, especially during the peak holiday season but also at other times, could also adversely affect the Company’s net sales and could make it more difficult for the Company to obtain sufficient quantities of merchandise from its suppliers.

Competition in the retail industry could limit the Company’s growth opportunities and reduce its profitability.  The Company competes in the discount retail merchandise business, which is highly competitive.  This competitive environment subjects the Company to the risk of reduced profitability resulting from reduced margins required to maintain the Company’s competitive position.  The Company competes with discount stores and with many other retailers, including mass merchandise, grocery, drug, convenience, variety and other specialty stores.  Some of the nation’s largest retail companies operate stores in areas where the Company operates.  The Company’s direct competitors in the dollar store retail category include Family Dollar, Dollar Tree, Fred’s, and various local, independent operators.  Competitors from other retail categories include CVS, Rite Aid, Walgreens, Eckerd, Wal-Mart and Kmart.  The discount retail merchandise business is subject to excess capacity and some of the Company’s competitors are much larger and have substantially greater resources than the Company.  The competition for customers has intensified in recent years as larger competitors, such as Wal-Mart, have moved into the Company’s geographic markets.  The Company remains vulnerable to the marketing power and high level of consumer recognition of these major national discount chains, and to the risk that these chains or others could venture into the “dollar store” industry in a significant way.  Generally, the Company expects an increase in competition.



33






The Company’s financial performance is sensitive to changes in overall economic conditions that may impact consumer spending .  A general slowdown in the United States economy may adversely affect the spending of the Company’s consumers, which would likely result in lower net sales than expected on a quarterly or annual basis.  Future economic conditions affecting disposable consumer income, such as employment levels, business conditions, fuel and energy costs, interest rates, and tax rates, could also adversely affect the Company’s business by reducing consumer spending or causing consumers to shift their spending to other products.

Existing military efforts and the possibility of war, acts of terrorism and rising fuel costs could adversely impact the Company.  Existing U.S. military efforts, as well as the involvement of the United States in other military engagements, or a significant act of terrorism on U.S. soil or elsewhere, could have an adverse impact on the Company by, among other things, disrupting its information or distribution systems, causing dramatic increases in fuel prices thereby increasing the costs of doing business, or impeding the flow of imports or domestic products to the Company.

The Company’s business is dependent on its ability to obtain attractive pricing and other terms from its vendors and to timely receive inventory .  The Company believes that it has generally good relations with its vendors and that it is generally able to obtain attractive pricing and other terms from vendors.  If the Company fails to maintain good relations with its vendors, it may not be able to obtain attractive pricing with the consequence that its net sales or profit margins would be reduced.  The Company may also face difficulty in obtaining needed inventory from its vendors because of interruptions in production or for other reasons, which would adversely affect the Company’s business.  Also, prolonged or repeated price increases of certain raw materials could affect our vendors’ product costs, and, ultimately, the Company’s profitability.

The efficient operation of the Company’s business is heavily dependent on its information systems . The Company depends on a variety of information technology systems for the efficient functioning of its business.  The Company relies on certain software vendors to maintain and periodically upgrade many of these systems so that they can continue to support the Company’s business.  The software programs supporting many of the Company’s systems were licensed to the Company by independent software developers.  The inability of these developers or the Company to continue to maintain and upgrade these information systems and software programs would disrupt or reduce the efficiency of the Company’s operations if it were unable to convert to alternate systems in an efficient and timely manner.  In addition, costs and potential problems and interruptions associated with the implementation of new or upgraded systems and technology or with maintenance or adequate support of existing systems could also disrupt or reduce the efficiency of the Company’s operations.

The Company is subject to interest rate risk .  The Company is subject to market risk from exposure to changes in interest rates based on its financing, investing and cash management activities.  The Company may utilize its Credit Facility to fund working capital requirements, which is comprised of variable rate debt.  See “Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk.”



34






The Company is dependent upon the smooth functioning of its distribution network and upon the capacity of its DCs .  The Company relies upon the ability to replenish depleted inventory through deliveries to its DCs from vendors, and from the DCs to its stores by various means of transportation, including shipments by air, sea and truck on the roads and highways of the United States.  Labor shortages in the trucking industry could negatively impact transportation costs.  In addition, long-term disruptions to the national and international transportation infrastructure that lead to delays or interruptions of service would adversely affect the Company’s business.  Moreover, to facilitate its expected growth, the Company will need additional DCs in the coming years.  If the Company were unable to locate sites for the new DCs or were unable to achieve functionality of the new DCs in the time frame expected, the Company’s ability to achieve the expected growth could be inhibited.

Construction and expansion projects relating to the Company’s DCs entail risks which could cause delays and cost overruns, such as: shortages of materials; shortages of skilled labor or work stoppages; unforeseen construction scheduling, engineering, environmental or geological problems; weather interference; fires or other casualty losses; and unanticipated cost increases.  The completion dates and anticipated costs of these projects could differ significantly from initial expectations for construction-related or other reasons.  The Company cannot guarantee that any project will be completed on time or within established budgets.  

The Company’s success depends to a significant extent upon the abilities of its senior management team and the performance of its employees. The loss of services of key members of the Company’s senior management team or of certain other key employees could negatively impact the Company’s business.  In addition, future performance will depend upon the Company’s ability to attract, retain and motivate qualified employees to keep pace with its expansion schedule. The inability to do so may limit the Company’s ability to effectively penetrate new market areas.

If the Company cannot open new stores on schedule, its growth will be impeded.    Delays in store openings could adversely affect the Company’s future operations by slowing new store growth, which may in turn reduce its revenue growth.  The Company’s ability to timely open new stores and to expand into additional states will depend in part on the following factors: the availability of attractive store locations; the ability to negotiate favorable lease terms; the ability to hire and train new personnel, especially store managers; the ability to identify customer demand in different geographic areas; general economic conditions; and the availability of sufficient funds for expansion. Many of these factors are beyond the Company’s control.

The inability to execute operating initiatives could impact the Company’s operating results. The Company is undertaking a significant number of operating initiatives in 2005 that have the potential to be disruptive in the short term if they are not implemented effectively.  Ineffective implementation or execution of some or all of these initiatives could negatively impact the Company’s operating results.  

The Company’s cost of doing business could increase as a result of changes in federal, state or local regulations .  Unanticipated changes in the federal or state minimum wage or living wage requirements or changes in other wage or workplace regulations could adversely impact the Company’s ability to meet financial targets.  In addition, changes in these requirements or in federal, state or local regulations governing the sale of the Company’s products, particularly



35






“over-the-counter” medications or health products, would increase the Company’s cost of doing business and, with respect to regulations governing the sale of products, could adversely and materially impact the Company’s sales results.

Rising insurance costs and loss experience could negatively impact profitability .  The costs of insurance (workers’ compensation insurance, general liability insurance, health insurance, property insurance and directors’ and officers’ liability insurance) and loss experience have risen in recent years. If such increases continue, they could have a negative impact on the Company’s profitability.

The Company’s reputation and financial condition could be affected by the SEC investigation.   As previously disclosed in the Company’s periodic reports filed with the SEC, the Company restated its audited financial statements for fiscal years 1999 and 1998, and certain unaudited financial information for fiscal year 2000, by means of its Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended February 2, 2001, which was filed on January 14, 2002 (the “2001 Restatement”).

The SEC has been conducting an investigation into the circumstances giving rise to the 2001 Restatement and, on January 8, 2004, the Company received notice that the SEC staff was considering recommending that the SEC bring a civil injunctive action against the Company for alleged violations of the federal securities laws in connection with circumstances relating to the 2001 Restatement.  The Company subsequently reached an agreement in principle with the SEC staff to settle the matter.  Under the terms of the agreement in principle, the Company will consent, without admitting or denying the allegations in a complaint to be filed by the SEC, to the entry of a permanent civil injunction against future violations of the antifraud, books and records, reporting and internal control provisions of the federal securities laws and related SEC rules and will pay a $10 million nondeductible civil penalty. The agreement with the SEC staff is subject to final approval by the court in which the SEC’s complaint is filed.  The Company accrued $10 million with respect to the penalty in its financial statements for the year ended January 30, 2004, and this accrual remains outstanding as of January 28, 2005. The Company can give no assurances that the court will approve this agreement.  If the agreement is not approved, the Company could be subject to different or additional penalties, both monetary and non-monetary, which could adversely affect the Company’s financial statements as a whole.  The publicity surrounding the SEC investigation and settlement also could affect the Company’s reputation and have an adverse impact on its financial statements as a whole.

Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on forward-looking statements made herein, since the statements speak only as of the date of this report.  Except as may be required by law, the Company undertakes no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statements contained herein to reflect events or circumstances occurring after the date of this report or to reflect the occurrence of unanticipated events.  Readers are advised, however, to consult any further disclosures the Company may make on related subjects in its documents filed with or furnished to the SEC or in its other public disclosures.



36






ITEM 7A.

QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

Financial Risk Management

The Company is exposed to market risk primarily from adverse changes in interest rates.  To minimize such risk, the Company may periodically use financial instruments, including derivatives.  As a matter of policy, the Company does not buy or sell financial instruments for speculative or trading purposes and all financial instrument transactions must be authorized and executed pursuant to approval by the Board of Directors.  All financial instrument positions taken by the Company are used to reduce risk by hedging an underlying economic exposure.  Because of high correlation between the financial instrument and the underlying exposure being hedged, fluctuations in the value of the financial instruments are generally offset by reciprocal changes in the value of the underlying economic exposure.  The financial instruments used by the Company are straightforward instruments with liquid markets.

The Company has cash flow exposure relating to variable interest rates associated with its revolving line of credit, and may periodically seek to manage this risk through the use of interest rate derivatives.  The primary interest rate exposure on variable rate obligations is based on the London Interbank Offered Rate (“LIBOR”).  

At January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, the fair value of the Company’s debt, excluding capital lease obligations, was approximately $278.7 million and $265.4 million, respectively (net of the fair value of a note receivable on the South Boston, Virginia DC of approximately $50.0 million and $48.9 million, respectively, as further discussed in Note 8 to the Consolidated Financial Statements), based upon the estimated market value of the debt at those dates.  Such fair value exceeded the carrying values of the debt at January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004 by approximately $35.5 million and $21.7 million, respectively.

At February 1, 2002, the Company was party to an interest rate swap agreement with a notional amount of $100 million.  The Company designated this agreement as a hedge of its floating rate commitments relating to a portion of certain synthetic lease agreements that existed at that time.  Under the terms of the agreement, the Company paid a fixed rate of 5.60% and received a floating rate (LIBOR) on the $100 million notional amount through September 1, 2002.  The fair value of the interest rate swap agreement was $(2.6) million at February 1, 2002.  The counterparty to the Company’s interest rate swap agreement was a major financial institution.  The interest rate swap agreement expired on September 1, 2002. As of January 28, 2005, the Company was not party to any interest rate derivatives.

In 2002, as required by SFAS No. 133, the Company recorded the fair value of the interest rate swap in the balance sheet, with the offsetting, effective portion of the change in fair value recorded in Other comprehensive loss, a separate component of Shareholders’ equity in the Consolidated Financial Statements.  Amounts recorded in Other comprehensive loss were reclassified into earnings, as an adjustment to interest expense, in the same period during which the hedged synthetic lease agreements affected earnings.  



37






Based upon the Company’s variable rate borrowing levels, a 1% adverse change in interest rates would have resulted in a pre-tax reduction of earnings and cash flows of less than $0.1 million and approximately $1.7 million in 2004 and 2002, respectively, including the effects of interest rate swaps in 2002.  In 2003, the Company had no outstanding variable rate borrowings.  Based upon the Company’s outstanding indebtedness at January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, a 1% reduction in interest rates would have resulted in an increase in the fair value of the Company’s fixed rate debt of approximately $10.5 million and $14.8 million, respectively.




38






ITEM 8.

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA


Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm


To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of

Dollar General Corporation

Goodlettsville, Tennessee


We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Dollar General Corporation and subsidiaries as of January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, and the related consolidated statements of income, shareholders' equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended January 28, 2005. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.


We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.


In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Dollar General Corporation and subsidiaries as of January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, and the consolidated results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended January 28, 2005, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.


As discussed in Note 2 to the consolidated financial statements, the accompanying consolidated balance sheet as of January 30, 2004 and consolidated statements of income, shareholders' equity, and cash flows for the years ended January 30, 2004 and January 31, 2003 have been restated to correct the accounting for leases.


We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the effectiveness of Dollar General Corporation and subsidiaries’ internal control over financial reporting as of January 28, 2005, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission and our report dated April 5, 2005 expressed an unqualified opinion on management's assessment and an adverse opinion on the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting.


                                                                            /s/ Ernst & Young LLP

Nashville, Tennessee

April 5, 2005



39






CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
(Dollars in thousands except per share amounts)

 

January 28,
2005

 

January 30,
2004

     

(Restated)

ASSETS

         

Current assets:

         

Cash and cash equivalents

$

232,830 

 

$

345,899 

Short-term investments

 

42,925 

   

68,726 

Merchandise inventories

 

1,376,537 

   

1,157,141 

Deferred income taxes

 

24,908 

   

30,413 

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

 

53,702 

   

50,036 

Total current assets

 

1,730,902 

   

1,652,215 

Net property and equipment

 

1,080,838 

   

957,632 

Other assets, net

 

29,264 

   

11,270 

Total assets

$

2,841,004 

 

$

2,621,117 

           

LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

         

Current liabilities:

         

Current portion of long-term obligations

$

12,860 

 

$

16,670 

Accounts payable

 

409,327 

   

383,791 

Accrued expenses and other

 

333,889 

   

303,156 

Income taxes payable

 

69,616 

   

45,725 

Total current liabilities

 

825,692 

   

749,342 

Long-term obligations

 

258,462 

   

265,337 

Deferred income taxes

 

72,385 

   

52,139 

Commitments and contingencies

         

Shareholders’ equity:

         

Series B junior participating preferred stock, stated
value $0.50 per share; Shares authorized:
10,000,000; Issued:  None

 

   

Common stock, par value $0.50 per share;
Shares authorized: 500,000,000; Issued:
2004-328,172,000; 2003-336,190,000

 

164,086 

   

168,095 

Additional paid-in capital

 

421,600 

   

376,930 

Retained earnings

 

1,102,457 

   

1,014,788 

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

 

(973)

   

(1,161)

   

1,687,170 

   

1,558,652 

Other shareholders’ equity

 

(2,705)

   

(4,353)

Total shareholders’ equity

 

1,684,465 

   

1,554,299 

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

$

2,841,004 

 

$

2,621,117 


The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.



40






CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME

(Dollars in thousands except per share amounts)

 

For the years ended

 

January 28,
2005

 

January 30,
2004

 

January 31,
2003

     

(Restated)

 

(Restated)

                       

Net sales

$

7,660,927 

   

$

6,871,992 

   

$

6,100,404 

 
                       

Cost of goods sold

 

5,397,735 

     

4,853,863 

     

4,376,138 

 
                       

Gross profit

 

2,263,192 

     

2,018,129 

     

1,724,266 

 
                       

Selling, general and administrative

 

1,706,216 

     

1,500,103 

     

1,300,831 

 
                       

Penalty expense and litigation settlement proceeds

 

     

10,000 

     

(29,541)

 
                       

Operating profit

 

556,976 

     

508,026 

     

452,976 

 
                       

Interest income

 

(6,575)

     

(4,103)

     

(4,305)

 
                       

Interest expense

 

28,794 

     

35,606 

     

46,944 

 
                       

Income before income taxes

 

534,757 

     

476,523 

     

410,337 

 
                       

Income taxes

 

190,567 

     

177,521 

     

147,986 

 
                       

Net income

$

344,190 

   

$

299,002 

   

$

262,351 

 
                       

Earnings per share:

                     

        Basic

$

1.04 

   

$

0.89 

   

$

0.79 

 
                       

        Diluted

$

1.04 

   

$

0.89 

   

$

0.78 

 
                       

Weighted average shares:

                     

         Basic

 

329,376 

     

334,697 

     

333,055 

 
                       

         Diluted

 

332,068 

     

337,636 

     

335,050 

 
 



The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.



41






CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

(Dollars in thousands except per share amounts)

 

Common Stock

Additional Paid-in Capital

Retained Earnings

Accumulated Other Comprehensive Loss

Other Shareholders’ Equity

Total

Balances, February 1, 2002

           

   (as previously reported)

$     166,359 

$         301,848 

$    579,265 

$               (3,228)

$         (2,526)

$   1,041,718 

Cumulative effect of restatement

           

   on prior years (See Note 2)

(18,028)

(18,028)

Balances, February 1, 2002 (restated)

$     166,359 

$         301,848 

$    561,237 

$               (3,228)

$        (2,526)

$   1,023,690 

Comprehensive income:

           

Net income

262,351 

262,351 

Net change in fair value of derivatives

277 

277 

Reclassification of net loss on derivatives

1,602 

1,602 

Comprehensive income

         

264,230 

Cash dividends, $0.13 per common share,

net of accruals

(31,991)

(31,991)

Issuance of common stock under stock incentive plans (710,000 shares)

355 

4,666 

5,021 

Tax benefit from stock option exercises

2,372 

2,372 

Purchase of common stock by employee deferred compensation trust, net (27,000 shares)

(98)

(347)

(445)

Amortization of unearned compensation on restricted stock and restricted stock units

131 

131 

Contribution of capital

6,031 

6,031 

Other equity transactions

(44)

(1,550)

(1,594)

Balances, January 31, 2003 (restated)

$      166,670 

$         313,269 

$      791,597 

$               (1,349)

$        (2,742)

$   1,267,445 

Comprehensive income:

           

Net income

299,002 

299,002 

Reclassification of net loss on derivatives

188 

188 

Comprehensive income

         

299,190 

Cash dividends, $0.14 per common share

(46,883)

(46,883)

Issuance of common stock under stock incentive plans (4,240,000 shares)

2,120 

47,365 

49,485 

Tax benefit from stock option exercises

14,565 

14,565 

Repurchases of common stock
(1,519,000 shares)

(759)

(28,928)

(29,687)

Purchase of common stock by employee deferred compensation trust, net (11,000 shares)

(157)

(154)

Issuance of restricted stock (129,000 shares)

64 

1,904 

(1,968)

Amortization of unearned compensation on restricted stock

354 

354 

Other equity transactions

(16)

(16)

Balances, January 30, 2004 (restated)

$    168,095 

$         376,930 

$ 1,014,788 

$               (1,161)

$        (4,353)

$   1,554,299 

Comprehensive income:

           

Net income

344,190 

344,190 

Reclassification of net loss on derivatives

188 

188 

Comprehensive income

         

344,378 

Cash dividends, $0.16 per common share

(52,682)

(52,682)

Issuance of common stock under stock incentive plans (2,875,000 shares)

1,437 

32,691 

34,128 

Tax benefit from stock option exercises

9,657 

9,657 

Repurchases of common stock
(11,020,000 shares)

(5,510)

(203,785)

(209,295)

Purchase of common stock by employee deferred compensation trust, net (25,000 shares)

(92)

(377)

(469)

Issuance of restricted stock and restricted stock units (128,000 shares)

64 

2,398 

(2,462)

Amortization of unearned compensation on restricted stock and restricted stock units

1,779 

1,779 

Deferred compensation obligation

2,708 

2,708 

Other equity transactions

16 

(54)

(38)

Balances, January 28, 2005

$    164,086 

$         421,600 

$ 1,102,457 

$                  (973)

$        (2,705)

$   1,684,465 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.



42






CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

(Dollars in thousands)

   

For the years ended

   

January 28,
2005

 

January 30,
2004

 

January 31,
2003

             

(Restated)

     

(Restated)

 

Cash flows from operating activities:

                       

Net income

 

$

344,190 

   

$

299,002 

   

$

262,351 

 

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:

                       

Depreciation and amortization

   

164,478 

     

154,457 

     

138,590 

 

Deferred income taxes

   

25,751 

     

18,611 

     

81,173 

 

Tax benefit from stock option exercises

   

9,657 

     

14,565 

     

2,372 

 

Litigation settlement

   

     

     

(162,000)

 

Change in operating assets and liabilities:

                       

Merchandise inventories

   

(219,396)

     

(34,110)

     

7,992 

 

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

   

(3,666)

     

(16,304)

     

1,239 

 

Accounts payable

   

22,258 

     

33,265 

     

18,420 

 

Accrued expenses and other

   

35,048 

     

60,523 

     

15,269 

 

Income taxes

   

23,793 

     

(21,464)

     

56,458 

 

Other

   

(12,377)

     

5,166 

     

430 

 

Net cash provided by operating activities

   

389,736 

     

513,711 

     

422,294 

 

Cash flows from investing activities:

                       

Purchases of property and equipment

   

(292,172)

     

(140,139)

     

(133,895)

 

Purchases of short-term investments

   

(221,700)

     

(201,950)

     

(2,500)

 

Sales of short-term investments

   

247,501 

     

134,725 

     

2,500  

 

Purchase of promissory notes

   

     

(49,582)

     

 

Proceeds from sale of property and equipment

   

3,324 

     

269 

     

481 

 

Net cash used in investing activities

   

(263,047)

     

(256,677)

     

(133,414)

 

Cash flows from financing activities:

                       

Borrowings under revolving credit facility

   

195,000 

     

     

 

Repayments of borrowings under revolving credit facility

   

(195,000)

     

 - 

     

 

Repayments of long-term obligations

   

(12,539)

     

(15,907)

     

(397,094)

 

Payment of cash dividends

   

(52,682)

     

(46,883)

     

(42,638)

 

Proceeds from exercise of stock options

   

34,128 

     

49,485 

     

5,021 

 

Repurchases of common stock

   

(209,295)

     

(29,687)

     

 

Other financing activities

   

630 

     

73 

     

(5,702)

 

Net cash used in financing activities

   

(239,758)

     

(42,919)

     

(440,413)

 

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

   

(113,069)

     

 214,115 

     

(151,533)

 

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year

   

345,899 

     

131,784 

     

283,317 

 

Cash and cash equivalents, end of year

 

$

232,830 

   

$

345,899 

   

$

131,784 

 

Supplemental cash flow information:

                       

Cash paid during year for:

                       

Interest

 

$

26,748 

   

$

31,256 

   

$

41,015 

 

Income taxes

 

$

133,100 

   

$

165,248 

   

$

1,834 

 

Supplemental schedule of noncash investing and financing activities:

                       

Purchases of property and equipment awaiting processing for payment, included in Accounts payable

 

$

12,921 

   

$

9,643

   

$

420 

 

Purchases of property and equipment under capital lease obligations

 

$

1,844 

   

$

996

   

$

8,453 

 

The accompanying notes are an integral part of the consolidated financial statements.



43






NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1.

Basis of presentation and accounting policies

Basis of presentation

These notes contain references to the years 2005, 2004, 2003 and 2002, which represent fiscal years ending or ended February 3, 2006, January 28, 2005, January 30, 2004 and January 31, 2003, respectively. Fiscal year 2005 will be a 53-week accounting period while 2004, 2003 and 2002 were 52-week accounting periods.  The Company’s fiscal year ends on the Friday closest to January 31. The consolidated financial statements include all subsidiaries of the Company, except for its not-for-profit subsidiary the assets and revenues of which are not material.  Intercompany transactions have been eliminated.

The Company leases four of its distribution centers (“DCs”) from lessors, which meets the definition of a Variable Interest Entity (“VIE”) as described by FASB Interpretation No. 46, “Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities” (“FIN 46”), as revised. Two of these DCs have been recorded as financing obligations whereby the property and equipment, along with the related lease obligations, are reflected in the consolidated balance sheets.  The other two DCs, excluding the equipment, have been recorded as operating leases in accordance with SFAS No. 98, “Accounting for Leases.”  The Company is not the primary beneficiary of these VIEs and, accordingly, has not included these entities in its consolidated financial statements.

Business description

The Company sells general merchandise on a retail basis through 7,320 stores (as of January 28, 2005) located in the southern, eastern and midwestern United States.  The Company has DCs in Scottsville, Kentucky; Ardmore, Oklahoma; South Boston, Virginia; Indianola, Mississippi; Fulton, Missouri; Alachua, Florida; and Zanesville, Ohio.  The Company also has a DC under construction near Jonesville, South Carolina.

The Company purchases its merchandise from a wide variety of suppliers. Approximately 10% of the Company’s purchases in 2004 were made from Procter and Gamble.  No other supplier accounted for more than 3% of the Company’s purchases in 2004.  

Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents include highly liquid investments with insignificant interest rate risk and original maturities of three months or less when purchased.  They primarily consist of money market funds, certificates of deposit and commercial paper.  The carrying amounts of these items are a reasonable estimate of their fair value due to the short maturity of these investments.

Payments due from banks for third-party credit card, debit card and electronic benefit transactions (“EBT”) classified as cash and cash equivalents totaled approximately $4.8 million and $1.1 million at January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, respectively.



44






The Company’s cash management system provides for daily investment of available balances and the funding of outstanding checks when presented for payment.  Outstanding but unpresented checks totaling approximately $112.3 million and $105.2 million at January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, respectively, have been included in Accounts payable in the consolidated balance sheets.  Upon presentation for payment, these checks are funded through available cash balances or the Company’s existing credit facility.

Investments in debt and equity securities


The Company accounts for its investment in debt and marketable equity securities in accordance with Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 115, “Accounting for Certain Investments in Debt and Equity Securities” and accordingly, classifies them as held-to-maturity, available-for-sale, or trading.  Debt securities categorized as held-to-maturity are stated at amortized cost.  Debt and equity securities categorized as available-for-sale are stated at fair value, with any unrealized gains and losses, net of deferred income taxes, reported as a component of Accumulated other comprehensive loss.  Trading securities are stated at fair value, with changes in fair value recorded in income as a component of Selling, general and administrative expense.


In general, the Company invests excess cash in shorter-dated, highly liquid investments such as money market funds, certificates of deposit, and commercial paper.  Depending on the type of securities purchased (debt versus equity) as well as the Company’s intentions with respect to the potential sale of such securities before their stated maturity dates, such securities have been classified as held-to-maturity or available-for-sale.  Given the short maturities of such investments (except for those securities described in further detail below), the carrying amounts approximate the fair values of such securities.


Additionally, beginning in fiscal year 2003, the Company began investing in auction rate securities, which are debt instruments having longer-dated (in some cases, many years) legal maturities, but with interest rates that are generally reset every 28-35 days under an auction system.  Because auction rate securities are frequently re-priced, they trade in the market like short-term investments.  As available-for-sale securities, these investments are carried at fair value, which approximates cost given that the average duration that such securities are held by the Company is less than 40 days.  Despite the liquid nature of these investments, the Company categorizes them as short-term investments instead of cash and cash equivalents due to the underlying legal maturities of such securities.  However, they have been classified as current assets as they are generally available to support the Company’s current operations. Auction rate securities of $67.2 million were reclassified from cash in the prior year financial statements to conform to the current year presentation.


The Company’s investment in the secured promissory notes issued by the third-party entity from which the Company leases its DC in South Boston, Virginia, as discussed in Note 8, has been classified as a held-to-maturity security.  The investments in mutual funds by participants in the Company’s supplemental retirement and compensation deferral plans discussed in Note 9 have been classified as trading securities. Historical cost information pertaining to such trading securities is not readily available to the Company since individuals hold these investments in compensation deferral plans.



45







On January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, held-to-maturity, available-for-sale and trading securities consisted of the following (in thousands):

       

Gross Unrealized

   

January 28, 2005

 

Cost

 

Gains

 

Losses

 

Estimated
Fair Value

Held-to-maturity securities

                               

Bank and corporate debt

 

$

45,422

   

$

-

   

$

-

   

$

45,422

 

Other debt securities

   

48,179

     

1,808

     

-

     

49,987

 
     

93,601

     

1,808

     

-

     

95,409

 
                                 

Available-for-sale securities

                               

Equity securities

   

38,618

     

-

     

-

     

38,618

 

Other debt securities

   

42,425

     

-

     

-

     

42,425

 
     

81,043

     

-

     

-

     

81,043

 
                                 

Trading securities

                               

Equity securities

   

11,932

     

-

     

-

     

11,932

 
                                 

Total debt and equity securities

 

$

186,576

   

$

1,808

   

$

-

   

$

188,384

 
                                 


       

Gross Unrealized

   

January 30, 2004

 

Cost

 

Gains

 

Losses

 

Estimated
Fair Value

Held-to-maturity securities

                               

Bank and corporate debt

 

$

261,604

   

$

-

   

$

-

   

$

261,604

 

Other debt securities

   

49,132

     

-

     

232

     

48,900

 
     

310,736

     

-

     

232

     

310,504

 
                                 

Available-for-sale securities

                               

Equity securities

   

16,000

     

-

     

-

     

16,000

 

Other debt securities

   

67,225

     

-

     

-

     

67,225

 
     

83,225

     

-

     

-

     

83,225

 
                                 

Trading securities

                               

Equity securities

   

10,919

     

-

     

-

     

10,919

 
                                 

Total debt and equity securities

 

$

404,880

   

$

-

   

$

232

   

$

404,648

 
                                 

On January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, these investments were included in the following accounts in the consolidated balance sheets (in thousands):



January 28, 2005

Held-to-Maturity Securities

 

Available-
for-Sale Securities

 

Trading

Securities

Cash and cash equivalents

$

44,922

   

$

38,618

   

$

-

 

Short-term investments

 

500

     

42,425

     

-

 

Other current assets

 

-

     

-

     

11,932

 

Current portion of long-term obligations (see Note 8)

 

1,048

     

-

     

-

 

Long-term obligations (see Note 8)

 

47,131

     

-

     

-

 
 

$

93,601

   

$

81,043

   

$

11,932

 


46









January 30, 2004

Held-to-Maturity Securities

 

Available-
for-Sale Securities

 

Trading

Securities

Cash and cash equivalents

$

260,103

   

$

16,000

   

$

-

 

Short-term investments

 

1,501

     

67,225

     

-

 

Other current assets

 

-

     

-

     

10,919

 

Current portion of long-term obligations (see Note 8)

 

971

     

-

     

-

 

Long-term obligations (see Note 8)

 

48,161

     

-

     

-

 
 

$

310,736

   

$

83,225

   

$

10,919

 


The contractual maturities of held-to-maturity and available-for-sale securities as of January 28, 2005 were as follows (in thousands):


 

Held-to-Maturity Securities

 

Available-for-Sale Securities

 

Cost

Fair Value

 

Cost

Fair Value

Less than one year

$

45,422

 

$

45,422

   

$

-

 

$

-

 

One to three years

 

-

   

-

     

-

   

-

 

Greater than three years

 

48,179

   

49,987

     

42,425

   

42,425

 

Equity securities

 

-

   

-

     

38,618

   

38,618

 
 

$

93,601

 

$

95,409

   

$

81,043

 

$

81,043

 


For the years ended January 28, 2005, January 30, 2004, and January 31, 2003, gross realized gains and losses on the sales of available-for-sale securities were not material.  The cost of securities sold is based upon the specific identification method.

Merchandise inventories

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost or market with cost determined using the retail last-in, first-out (“LIFO”) method. The excess of current cost over LIFO cost was approximately $6.3 million at January 28, 2005 and $6.5 million at January 30, 2004. Current cost is determined using the retail first-in, first-out method.  LIFO reserves decreased $0.2 million in 2004, increased $0.7 million in 2003 and decreased $8.9 million in 2002.  Costs directly associated with warehousing and distribution are capitalized into inventory.

Pre-opening costs

Pre-opening costs for new stores are expensed as incurred.

Property and equipment

Property and equipment are recorded at cost.  The Company provides for depreciation and amortization on a straight-line basis over the following estimated useful lives:

 

Land improvements

20

 

Buildings

39-40

 

Furniture, fixtures and equipment

3-10





47






Improvements of leased properties are amortized over the shorter of the life of the applicable lease term or the estimated useful life of the asset.


Impairment of long-lived assets

When indicators of impairment are present, the Company evaluates the carrying value of long-lived assets, other than goodwill, in relation to the operating performance and future undiscounted cash flows or the appraised values of the underlying assets.  The Company adjusts the net book value of the underlying assets based upon an analysis of the sum of expected future cash flows compared to the book value, and may also consider appraised values.  Assets to be disposed of are adjusted to the fair value less the cost to sell if less than the book value.  The Company recorded impairment charges of approximately $0.5 million and $0.6 million in 2004 and 2003, respectively, and $4.7 million prior to 2002 to reduce the carrying value of the Homerville, Georgia DC (which was closed in fiscal 2000 and sold in 2004).  The Company also recorded impairment charges of approximately $0.2 million in each of 2004 and 2003 to reduce the carrying value of certain of its stores based upon negative sales trends and cash flows at these locations. These charges are included in Selling, general and administrative (“SG&A”) expense.

Other assets

Other assets consist primarily of debt issuance costs which are amortized over the life of the related obligations, utility and security deposits, life insurance policies and goodwill.

Vendor rebates

The Company records vendor rebates, primarily consisting of new store allowances and volume purchase rebates, when realized.  The rebates are recorded as a reduction to inventory purchases, at cost, which has the effect of reducing cost of goods sold, as prescribed by Emerging Issues Task Force (“EITF”) Issue No. 02-16, “Accounting by a Customer (including a Reseller) for Certain Consideration Received from a Vendor” (“EITF 02-16”).

Operating leases

Contingent rentals . The Company recognizes contingent rental expense when the achievement of specified sales targets are considered probable, in accordance with EITF Issue No. 98-9, “Accounting for Contingent Rent.” The amount expensed but not paid as of January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004 was approximately $8.6 million and $8.9 million, respectively, and is included in Accrued expenses and other in the consolidated balance sheets. (See Notes 4 and 8).

Deferred rent . The Company records rental expense on a straight-line basis over the base, non-cancelable lease term commencing on the date that the Company takes physical possession of the property.  Any difference between the calculated expense and the amounts actually paid are reflected as a liability in Accrued expenses and other in the consolidated balance sheets and totaled approximately $18.0 million and $14.0 million at January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, respectively.



48






Insurance claims provisions

The Company retains a significant portion of risk for its workers' compensation, employee health, general liability, property and automobile claim exposures.  Accordingly, provisions are made for the Company's estimates of such risks.  Actuaries are utilized to determine the undiscounted future claim costs for the workers' compensation, general liability, and health claim risks.  To the extent that subsequent claim costs vary from those estimates, future results of operations will be affected. The Greater Cumberland Insurance Company (“GCIC”), a Vermont-based wholly-owned captive insurance subsidiary of the Company, charges the operating subsidiary companies premiums to insure the retained workers' compensation and non-property general liability exposures.  GCIC currently insures no unrelated third-party risk.

Fair value of financial instruments

The carrying amounts reflected in the consolidated balance sheets for cash, cash equivalents, short-term investments, receivables and payables approximate their respective fair values.  At January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, the fair value of the Company’s debt, excluding capital lease obligations, was approximately $278.7 million and $265.4 million, respectively, (net of the fair value of a note receivable on the South Boston, Virginia DC of approximately $50.0 million and $48.9 million, respectively, as discussed in Note 8) based upon the estimated market value of the debt at those dates.  Such fair value exceeded the carrying values of the debt at January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004 by approximately $35.5 million and $21.7 million, respectively. Fair values are based primarily on quoted prices for those or similar instruments.  A discussion of the carrying value and fair value of the Company’s derivative financial instruments is included in the section entitled “Derivative financial instruments” below.

Derivative financial instruments

The Company accounts for derivative financial instruments in accordance with the provisions of SFAS No. 133, “Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities”, as amended by SFAS Nos. 137, 138 and 149 and interpreted by numerous Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) Issues. These statements require the Company to recognize all derivative instruments on the balance sheet at fair value, and contain accounting rules for hedging instruments, which depend on the nature of the hedge relationship.

The Company has historically used derivative financial instruments primarily to reduce its exposure to adverse fluctuations in interest rates and, to a much lesser extent, other market exposures.

As a matter of policy, the Company does not buy or sell financial instruments, including derivatives, for speculative or trading purposes and all financial instrument transactions must be authorized and executed pursuant to the approval of the Board of Directors. All financial instrument positions taken by the Company are used to reduce risk by hedging an underlying economic exposure and are structured as straightforward instruments with liquid markets. The Company primarily executes derivative transactions with major financial institutions.



49






For a portion of fiscal year 2002, the Company was party to an interest rate swap agreement with a notional amount of $100 million. The Company designated this agreement as a hedge of the floating rate commitments relating to a portion of certain synthetic lease agreements that existed at that time.  Under the terms of the agreement, the Company paid a fixed rate of 5.60% and received a floating rate (LIBOR) on the $100 million notional amount through September 1, 2002. This interest rate swap matured in September 2002, and, as of January 28, 2005, the Company had no outstanding derivative financial instruments. While outstanding, this derivative was 100% effective in hedging the floating rate commitments relating to the underlying exposure being hedged. Accordingly, no hedge ineffectiveness was recognized by the Company relating to this hedging relationship.

The following table summarizes activity in Accumulated other comprehensive loss during 2004 related to derivative transactions used by the Company in prior periods to hedge cash flow exposures relating to certain debt transactions (in thousands):

 

Before-Tax

Amount

 

Income Tax

 

After-Tax

Amount

Accumulated net losses as of January 30, 2004

$

(1,825)

   

$

664 

   

$

(1,161)

 

Net losses reclassified from Other comprehensive loss into earnings

 

286 

     

(98)

     

188 

 

Accumulated net losses as of January 28, 2005

$

(1,539)

   

$

566 

   

$

(973)

 


The balance remaining in Accumulated other comprehensive loss at January 28, 2005 relates solely to deferred losses realized in June 2000 on the settlement of an interest rate derivative that was designated and effective as a cash flow hedge of the Company’s forecasted issuance of its $200 million of fixed rate notes in June 2000 (see Note 6). This amount will be reclassified into earnings as an adjustment to the effective interest expense on the fixed rate notes through their maturity date in June 2010. The Company estimates that it will reclassify into earnings during the next twelve months approximately $0.2 million of the net amount recorded in Other comprehensive loss as of January 28, 2005.


Stock-based compensation

The Company has a shareholder-approved stock incentive plan under which stock options, restricted stock, restricted stock units and other equity-based awards may be granted to officers, directors and key employees.  Stock options currently are granted under this plan at the market price on the grant date and generally vest ratably over a four-year period, with certain exceptions as further described in Note 10. All stock options granted under this plan have a ten-year life subject to earlier termination upon death, disability or cessation of employment.  Options granted prior to 2002, either pursuant to this plan or pursuant to other shareholder-approved stock incentive plans from which the Company no longer grants awards, are subject to time-based vesting or a combination of Company performance-based and time-based vesting, and generally have a ten-year life.  In addition, prior to June 2003, the plan provided for automatic annual stock option grants to non-employee directors pursuant to a non-discretionary formula.  Those stock options vested one year after the grant date and generally have a ten-year life.



50






The Company accounts for stock option grants in accordance with Accounting Principles Board Opinion No. 25, “Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees” (“APB No. 25”), and related interpretations. Under APB No. 25, compensation expense is generally not recognized for plans in which the exercise price of the stock options equals the market price of the underlying stock on the date of grant and the number of shares subject to exercise is fixed. Had compensation cost for the Company’s stock-based compensation plans been determined based on the fair value at the grant date for awards under these plans consistent with the methodology prescribed under SFAS No. 123 (with compensation expense amortized ratably over the applicable vesting periods), net income and earnings per share would have been reduced to the pro forma amounts indicated in the following table.



(Amounts in thousands except per share data)

2004

 

2003

 

2002

Net income – as reported

$

344,190

 

$

299,002

 

$

262,351

Less pro forma effect of stock option grants

 

10,724

   

7,867

   

15,217

Net income – pro forma

$

333,466

 

$

291,135

 

$

247,134

Earnings per share – as reported

               

Basic

$

1.04

 

$

0.89

 

$

0.79

Diluted

$

1.04

 

$

0.89

 

$

0.78

Earnings per share – pro forma

               

Basic

$

1.01

 

$

0.87

 

$

0.74

Diluted

$

1.00

 

$

0.86

 

$

0.74


Prior to 2002, the Company modified its stock incentive plans to extend the exercise period for outstanding stock option grants from one to three years for estates of deceased employees, to the extent that the stock options were fully vested at the date of death.  However, this modification did not extend the ten-year maximum contractual exercise term following the date of grant.  In accordance with the provisions of APB No. 25, as interpreted, this modification has resulted in the recording of compensation expense, using the intrinsic-value based method of accounting, only for those vested stock options held by estates of employees which would benefit from the extended exercise period.  On the modification date, the Company could not estimate whether and to what extent estates of deceased employees would benefit from this modification and, accordingly, no compensation expense was recorded during 2001.  However, in subsequent periods, the Company has recognized and will continue to recognize compensation expense for those estates of deceased employees that benefit from the extended exercise period, and it is possible that such compensation expense could materially affect future consolidated financial statements. Total compensation expense relating to modifications of the Company’s stock option plans was less than $0.1 million in each of 2004, 2003 and 2002.

As allowed by the stock incentive plans, the Company has historically extended the exercise period for outstanding stock option grants to three years from the date of cessation of employment with the Company for former employees who meet certain “early retirement” criteria which may include their age and years of service, to the extent that their stock options were fully vested at the date their employment ended. However, this practice does not extend the ten-year maximum contractual exercise term following the date of grant.

The Company may periodically award restricted stock or restricted stock units to officers and other key employees under the stock incentive plan.  The terms of the stock incentive plan limit the total number of shares of restricted stock and restricted stock units eligible for issuance



51






thereunder to a maximum of 4 million shares.  Restricted stock awards consist of a fixed number of shares of common stock that generally vest ratably over three years.  Restricted stock units represent the right to receive one share of common stock for each unit upon vesting and  generally vest ratably over three years.  In addition, the stock incentive plan was amended in June 2003 to provide for the automatic annual grant of 4,600 restricted stock units to each non-employee director (6,000 restricted stock units to any non-employee director serving as Chairman) in lieu of the automatic annual stock option grants discussed previously. The initial grant of these restricted stock units was made in 2004.  These units generally vest one year after the grant date, subject to earlier vesting upon retirement or other circumstances described in the plan, but no payout shall be made until the individual has ceased to be a member of the Board of Directors.  Dividends or dividend equivalents, as the case may be, are paid or accrued on the grants of restricted stock and restricted stock units at the same rate that dividends are paid to shareholders generally.

The Company accounts for restricted stock grants in accordance with APB No. 25 and related interpretations.  Under APB No. 25, the Company calculates compensation expense as the difference between the market price of the underlying stock on the date of grant and the purchase price, if any, and recognizes such amount on a straight-line basis over the period in which the restricted stock award is earned by the recipient.  The Company recognized compensation expense relating to its restricted stock awards of approximately $1.8 million, $0.4 million and $0.1 million in 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively. (See Note 10).

Revenue and gain recognition

The Company recognizes sales at the time the sale is made to the customer. The Company records gain contingencies when realized.

Advertising costs

Advertising costs are expensed as incurred and were $7.9 million, $5.4 million and $7.1 million in 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively.  These costs primarily related to targeted circulars supporting new stores and in-store signage.

Interest during construction

To assure that interest costs properly reflect only that portion relating to current operations, interest on borrowed funds during the construction of property and equipment is capitalized.  Interest costs capitalized were approximately $3.6 million, $0.2 million and $0.1 million in 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively.

Income taxes

The Company reports income taxes in accordance with SFAS No. 109, “Accounting for Income Taxes.”  Under SFAS No. 109, the asset and liability method is used for computing future income tax consequences of events that have been recognized in the Company’s consolidated financial statements or income tax returns.  Deferred income tax expense or benefit is the net change during the year in the Company’s deferred income tax assets and liabilities.



52






Management estimates

The preparation of financial statements and related disclosures in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the consolidated financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting periods.  Actual results could differ from those estimates.

 Accounting pronouncements

In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 123R, “Share-Based Payment,” which will require all companies to measure compensation cost for all share-based payments (including employee stock options) at fair value. This new standard will be effective for public companies for interim or annual periods beginning after June 15, 2005. Companies can adopt the new standard in one of two ways: (i) the modified prospective application, in which a company would recognize share-based employee compensation cost from the beginning of the fiscal period in which the recognition provisions are first applied as if the fair-value-based accounting method had been used to account for all employee awards granted, modified, or settled after the effective date and to any awards that were not fully vested as of the effective date; or (ii) the modified retrospective application, in which a company would recognize employee compensation cost for periods presented prior to the adoption of SFAS No. 123R in accordance with the original provisions of SFAS No. 123 “Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation,” pursuant to which an entity would recognize employee compensation cost in the amounts reported in the pro forma disclosures provided in accordance with SFAS No. 123. The Company expects to adopt SFAS No. 123R during the third quarter of 2005, using the modified prospective application and expects to incur incremental expense associated with the adoption of approximately $4 million to $8 million in 2005. See “Stock-based compensation” above for additional disclosures pertaining to the pro forma effects of stock option grants as determined using the methodology prescribed under SFAS No. 123.


Reclassifications

Certain reclassifications of the 2003 and 2002 amounts have been made to conform to the 2004 presentation, including the reclassification of certain short-term investments which were previously classified as cash and cash equivalents as further described above.

2.

Restatement of Financial Statements


Following a review of the Company’s lease accounting and leasehold amortization practices, the Company identified areas where its practices differed from the views expressed by the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) in a letter released on February 7, 2005. The Company determined that it would change its practices, as discussed below, to conform to the SEC’s views and GAAP. The Company determined that, because the cumulative adjustments resulting from these corrections would have been material to the financial statements for the year ended January 28, 2005, it was required to restate its financial statements for fiscal years 2000 through 2003 (the “Restatement”). The Restatement was technically required even though the



53






adjustments for each individual year are not material to that year’s previously reported results (including previously reported 2004 results) and have no impact on the Company’s current or future cash flows.


Previously, the Company amortized all leasehold improvements over eight years, which was estimated to be the approximate useful life of the asset to the Company, given the nature of the assets and historical lease renewal practices. Under the corrected method, the Company has changed its practice to amortize leasehold improvements over the shorter of eight years or the applicable non-cancelable lease term. In addition, the Company previously recognized straight-line rent expense for leases beginning on the earlier of the store opening date or the rent payment commencement date, which had the effect of excluding the period used for preparing the store for opening (approximately 30 days) from the calculation of the period over which rent was expensed. Under the corrected method, the Company has changed its practice to include the period of time needed to prepare the store for opening in its calculation of straight-line rent.  


The following is a summary of the line items impacted by the Restatement for the 2003 Consolidated Balance Sheet and the 2003 and 2002 Consolidated Statements of Income and Shareholders’ Equity (in thousands, except per share data):

 

January 30, 2004

 

As Previously Reported

Adjustments

Restated

Net property and equipment

$

989,224 

 

$

(31,592)

 

$

957,632 

 

Accrued expenses and other

 

297,616 

   

5,540 

   

303,156 

 

Deferred income tax liability (long-term)

 

66,650 

   

(14,511)

   

52,139 

 

Retained earnings

 

1,037,409 

   

(22,621)

   

1,014,788 

 

Total shareholders' equity

 

1,576,920 

   

(22,621)

   

1,554,299 

 

Total liabilities and shareholders' equity

 

2,652,709 

   

(31,592)

   

2,621,117 

 


 

January 31, 2003

 

As Previously Reported

Adjustments

Restated

Total shareholders’ equity

$

1,288,068 

 

$

(20,623)

 

$

1,267,445 

 


 

February 1, 2002

 

As Previously Reported

Adjustments

Restated

Total shareholders’ equity

$

1,041,718 

 

$

(18,028)

 

$

1,023,690

 


 

For the year ended January 30, 2004

 

As Previously Reported

Adjustments

Restated

Selling, general and administrative

$

1,496,866 

 

$

3,237 

 

$

1,500,103 

 

Operating profit

 

511,263 

   

(3,237)

   

508,026 

 

Income before income taxes

 

479,760 

   

(3,237)

   

476,523 

 

Income taxes

 

178,760 

   

(1,239)

   

177,521 

 

Net income

 

301,000 

   

(1,998)

   

299,002 

 

Diluted earnings per share

 

0.89 

   

-  

   

0.89 

 


54







 

For the year ended January 31, 2003

 

As Previously Reported

Adjustments

Restated

Selling, general and administrative

$

1,296,542 

 

$

4,289 

 

$

1,300,831 

 

Operating profit

 

457,265 

   

(4,289)

   

452,976 

 

Income before income taxes

 

414,626 

   

(4,289)

   

410,337 

 

Income taxes

 

149,680 

   

(1,694)

   

147,986 

 

Net income

 

264,946 

   

(2,595)

   

262,351 

 

Diluted earnings per share

 

0.79 

   

   

0.78 

 


3.

Property and equipment

Property and equipment is recorded at cost and summarized as follows:

(In thousands)

2004

 

 2003

Land and land improvements

$

145,194

 

$

145,605

Buildings

 

333,667

   

333,765

Leasehold improvements

 

191,103

   

170,895

Furniture, fixtures and equipment

 

1,196,094

   

1,039,946

Construction in progress

 

74,277

   

19,511

   

1,940,335

   

1,709,722

Less accumulated depreciation and amortization

 

859,497

   

752,090

Net property and equipment

$

1,080,838

 

$

957,632


Depreciation expense related to property and equipment was approximately $163.1 million, $150.9 million and $139.0 million in 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively. Amortization of capital lease assets is included in depreciation expense.

4.

Accrued expenses and other

Accrued expenses and other consist of the following:

(In thousands)

2004

 

 2003

Compensation and benefits

$

72,815

 

$

78,374

Insurance

 

118,326

   

97,104

Taxes (other than taxes on income)

 

39,639

   

35,859

Other

 

103,109

   

91,819

 

$

333,889

 

$

303,156



55






5.

Income taxes

The provision for income taxes consists of the following:

(In thousands)

2004

 

2003

 

2002

Current:

               

Federal

$

155,497 

 

$

145,072 

 

$

55,646 

Foreign

 

1,169 

   

   

State

 

8,150 

   

13,838 

   

11,167 

   

164,816 

   

158,910 

   

66,813 

Deferred:

               

Federal

 

21,515 

   

17,224 

   

81,741 

Foreign

 

21 

   

   

State

 

4,215 

   

1,387 

   

(568)

   

25,751 

   

18,611 

   

81,173 

 

$

190,567 

 

$

177,521 

 

$

147,986 


A reconciliation between actual income taxes and amounts computed by applying the federal statutory rate to income before income taxes is summarized as follows:

 

  2004

 

  2003

 

  2002

U.S. federal statutory rate on
earnings before income taxes

$

187,165 

 

35.0 

%

 

$

166,783 

 

35.0 

%

 

$

143,618 

 

35.0 

%

State income taxes, net of federal income tax benefit

 

8,168 

 

1.5 

%

   

10,773 

 

2.3 

%

   

6,426 

 

1.6 

%

Jobs credits, net of federal income taxes

 

(5,544)

 

 (1.0)

%

   

(3,817)

 

(0.8)

%

   

(2,745)

 

(0.7)

%

Increase (decrease) in valuation allowance

 

(106)

 

 (0.0)

%

   

(582)

 

(0.1)

%

   

463 

 

0.1 

%

Non-deductible penalty (see
Note 8)

 

 

     

3,500 

 

0.7 

%

   

 

 

Other

 

884 

 

0.1 

%

   

864 

 

0.2 

%

   

224 

 

0.1 

%

 

$

190,567 

 

35.6 

%

 

$

177,521 

 

37.3 

%

 

$

147,986 

 

 36.1 

%


Sources of deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities are as follows:


(In thousands)

2004

 

2003

Deferred tax assets:

         

Deferred compensation expense

$

17,310 

 

$

20,466 

Accrued expenses and other

 

8,889 

   

7,521 

Workers compensation-related insurance liabilities

 

25,950 

   

9,198 

Deferred gain on sale/leasebacks

 

2,624 

   

2,775 

Other

 

3,755 

   

4,105 

State tax net operating loss carryforwards

 

9,180 

   

9,916 

State tax credit carryforwards

 

1,982 

   

1,568 

   

69,690 

   

55,549 

Less valuation allowance

 

(2,126)

   

(2,232)

Total deferred tax assets

 

67,564 

   

53,317 

Deferred tax liabilities:

         

Property and equipment

 

(82,807)

   

(60,091)

Inventories

 

(31,635)

   

(14,017)

Other

 

(599)

   

(935)

Total deferred tax liabilities

 

(115,041)

   

(75,043)

Net deferred tax liabilities

$

(47,477)

 

$

(21,726)



56






State net operating loss carryforwards as of January 28, 2005, totaled approximately $223 million and will expire between 2005 and 2024.  The Company also has state credit carryforwards of approximately $3.0 million that will expire between 2006 and 2016.  The valuation allowance has been provided principally for certain state loss carryforwards and state tax credits.  The change in the valuation allowance was a decrease of $0.1 million and $0.6 million and an increase of $0.5 million in 2004, 2003, and 2002, respectively.  Approximately $1.0 million of the 2003 valuation allowance reduction was due to certain state tax law changes during the year which caused the future recognition of certain state tax credit carryforwards to be considered more likely than not to occur, thereby resulting in the reduction of a valuation allowance created in an earlier year.  Based upon expected future income and available tax planning strategies, management believes that it is more likely than not that the results of operations will generate sufficient taxable income to realize the deferred tax assets after giving consideration to the valuation allowance.

The Company estimates its contingent income tax liabilities based on its assessment of probable income tax-related exposures and the anticipated settlement of those exposures translating into actual future liabilities. As of January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, the Company’s accrual for these contingent liabilities, included in Income taxes payable in the consolidated balance sheets, was approximately $13.5 million and $16.9 million, respectively, and the related accrued interest included in Accrued expenses and other in the consolidated balance sheets was approximately $6.9 million and $6.6 million respectively.

6.

Current and long-term obligations

Current and long-term obligations consist of the following:

(In thousands)

January 28, 2005

 

January 30, 2004

8 5/8% Notes due June 15, 2010, net of discount of $232 and $275, at January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, respectively

$

199,768 

     

$

199,725 

 

Capital lease obligations (see Note 8)

 

28,178 

       

38,228 

 

Financing obligations (see Note 8)

 

43,376 

       

44,054 

 
   

271,322 

       

282,007 

 

Less: current portion

 

(12,860)

       

(16,670)

 

Long-term portion

$

258,462 

     

$

265,337 

 


In June 2004, the Company amended its existing revolving credit facility (the “Credit Facility”). Under the terms of the amendment, the Credit Facility has a current maximum commitment of $250 million and expires in June 2009.  The amended Credit Facility contains provisions that would allow the maximum commitment to be increased to up to $400 million upon mutual agreement of the Company and its lenders. The Credit Facility, as amended, is unsecured. The Company pays interest on funds borrowed under the amended Credit Facility at rates that are subject to change based upon the ratio of the Company’s debt to EBITDA (as defined in the Credit Facility).  The Company has two interest rate options, base rate (which is usually equal to prime rate) or LIBOR.  Under the amended terms of the Credit Facility, the facility fees can range from 12.5 to 37.5 basis points; the all-in drawn margin under the LIBOR option can range from LIBOR plus 87.5 to 212.5 basis points; and the all-in drawn margin under the base rate option can range from the base rate plus 12.5 to 62.5 basis points. During 2004, the Company had peak borrowings of $73.1 million under the Credit Facility, and had no borrowings



57






during 2003. The Credit Facility contains financial covenants, which include limits on certain debt to cash flow ratios, a fixed charge coverage test, and minimum allowable consolidated net worth ($1.39 billion at January 28, 2005).  As of January 28, 2005, the Company was in compliance with all of these covenants. As of January 28, 2005, the Company had no outstanding borrowings and $8.7 million of standby letters of credit outstanding under the Credit Facility.

At January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, the Company had commercial letter of credit facilities totaling $215.0 and $218.0 million, respectively, of which $98.8 million and $111.7 million, respectively, were outstanding for the funding of imported merchandise purchases.

In 2000, the Company issued $200 million principal amount of 8 5/8% Notes due June 2010 (the “Notes”). The Notes require semi-annual interest payments in June and December of each year through June 15, 2010, at which time the entire balance becomes due and payable.  In addition, the Notes may be redeemed by the holders thereof at 100% of the principal amount, plus accrued and unpaid interest, on June 15, 2005.  Although the holders of the Notes have the ability to require the Company to repurchase the notes in June 2005, the Company has classified this debt as long-term due to its intent and ability, in the event it were required to repurchase any portion of the Notes, to refinance this indebtedness on a long-term basis, including through borrowings under the Credit Facility. The Notes contain certain restrictive covenants.  At January 28, 2005, the Company was in compliance with all such covenants.

7.

Earnings per share

The amounts reflected below are in thousands except per share data.

 

2004

 

Net

Income

 


Shares

     Per Share

    Amount

Basic earnings per share

$

344,190 

   

329,376

 

$

1.04

 

Effect of dilutive stock options

       

2,692

       

Diluted earnings per share

$

344,190 

   

332,068

 

$

1.04

 


 

2003

 

Net

Income

 


Shares

     Per Share

    Amount

Basic earnings per share

$

299,002 

   

334,697

 

$

0.89

 

Effect of dilutive stock options

       

2,939

       

Diluted earnings per share

$

299,002 

   

337,636

 

$

0.89

 


 

2002

 

Net

Income

 


Shares

     Per Share

    Amount

Basic earnings per share

$

262,351 

   

333,055

 

$

0.79 

 

Effect of dilutive stock options

       

1,995

       

Diluted earnings per share

$

262,351 

   

335,050

 

$

0.78 

 




58






Basic earnings per share was computed by dividing net income by the weighted average number of shares of common stock outstanding during the year.  Diluted earnings per share was determined based on the dilutive effect of stock options using the treasury stock method.

Options to purchase shares of common stock that were outstanding at the end of the respective fiscal year, but were not included in the computation of diluted earnings per share because the options’ exercise prices were greater than the average market price of the common shares, were 7.3 million, 5.1 million and 18.3 million in 2004, 2003, and 2002, respectively.

8.

Commitments and contingencies

As of January 28, 2005, the Company was committed under capital and operating lease agreements and financing obligations for most of its retail stores, four of its DCs, and certain of its furniture, fixtures and equipment.  The majority of the Company’s stores are subject to short-term leases (usually with initial or primary terms of three to five years) with multiple renewal options when available.  The Company also has stores subject to build-to-suit arrangements with landlords, which typically carry a primary lease term of between 7 and 10 years with multiple renewal options. Approximately half of the stores have provisions for contingent rentals based upon a percentage of defined sales volume.  Certain leases contain restrictive covenants.  As of January 28, 2005, the Company was in compliance with such covenants.

In January 1999 and April 1997, the Company sold its DCs located in Ardmore, Oklahoma and South Boston, Virginia, respectively, for 100% cash consideration.  Concurrent with the sale transactions, the Company leased the properties back for periods of 23 and 25 years, respectively.  The transactions have been recorded as financing obligations rather than sales as a result of, among other things, the lessor’s ability to put the properties back to the Company under certain circumstances.  The property and equipment, along with the related lease obligations, associated with these transactions are recorded in the consolidated balance sheets.

In May 2003, the Company purchased two secured promissory notes (the “DC Notes”) from Principal Life Insurance Company totaling $49.6 million. These DC Notes represent debt issued by a third party entity from which the Company leases its DC in South Boston, Virginia. This existing lease is recorded as a financing obligation in the consolidated financial statements. The DC Notes are being accounted for as “held to maturity” debt securities in accordance with the provisions of SFAS No. 115.  However, by acquiring these DC Notes, the Company is holding the debt instruments pertaining to its lease financing obligation and, because a legal right of offset exists, has reflected the acquired DC Notes as a reduction of its outstanding financing obligations in its consolidated financial statements in accordance with the provisions of FASB Interpretation No. 39, “Offsetting of Amounts Related to Certain Contracts – An Interpretation of APB Opinion No. 10 and FASB Statement No. 105.”  There was no gain or loss recognized as a result of this transaction.

Future minimum payments as of January 28, 2005, for capital leases, financing obligations and operating leases are as follows:



59







(In thousands)

Capital

leases

 

Financing obligations

 

  Operating

      leases

2005

$

13,966 

 

$

 9,283 

 

$

251,462 

 

2006

 

7,400 

   

 9,354 

   

206,635 

 

2007

 

3,972 

   

 9,564 

   

163,001 

 

2008

 

2,499 

   

 9,510 

   

124,567 

 

2009

 

1,427 

   

 8,915 

   

96,302 

 

Thereafter

 

5,905 

   

136,885 

   

323,078 

 
         

 

       

Total minimum payments

 

35,169 

   

 183,511 

 

$

1,165,045 

 

Less: imputed interest

 

(6,991)

   

(91,956)

       

Present value of net minimum lease payments

 

28,178 

   

 91,555 

       

Less: purchased promissory notes

 

   

(48,179)

       
   

28,178 

   

43,376 

       

Less: current portion, net

 

(12,021)

   

(839)

       

Long-term portion

$

16,157 

 

$

42,537 

       


Capital leases were discounted at an effective interest rate of approximately 8.8% at January 28, 2005.  The gross amount of property and equipment recorded under capital leases and financing obligations at January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, was $183.8 million and $184.4 million, respectively.  Accumulated depreciation on property and equipment under capital leases and financing obligations at January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004, was $94.5 million and $81.8 million, respectively.  

Rent expense under all operating leases was as follows:

(In thousands)

2004

 

2003

 

2002

Minimum rentals

$

253,364

   

$

217,704

   

$

187,568

 

Contingent rentals

 

15,417

     

14,302

     

15,500

 
 

$

268,781

   

$

232,006

   

$

203,068

 


Legal proceedings

Restatement-Related Proceedings.  As previously disclosed in the Company’s periodic reports filed with the SEC, the Company restated its audited financial statements for fiscal years 1999 and 1998, and certain unaudited financial information for fiscal year 2000, by means of its Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended February 2, 2001, which was filed on January 14, 2002 (the “2001 Restatement”).

The SEC conducted an investigation into the circumstances giving rise to the 2001 Restatement and, on January 8, 2004, the Company received notice that the SEC staff was considering recommending that the SEC bring a civil injunctive action against the Company for alleged violations of the federal securities laws in connection with circumstances relating to the restatement.  The Company subsequently reached an agreement in principle with the SEC staff to settle the matter.  Under the terms of the agreement in principle, the Company, without admitting or denying the allegations in a complaint to be filed by the SEC, will consent to the entry of a permanent civil injunction against future violations of the antifraud, books and records, reporting and internal control provisions of the federal securities laws and related SEC rules and will pay a



60






$10 million non-deductible civil penalty. The Company is not entitled to seek reimbursement from its insurers with regard to this settlement.

The Company has been informed that the SEC approved the agreement and intends to file its Complaint and the proposed Final Judgment and Consent and Undertakings of Dollar General Corporation with the United States District Court for the Middle District of Tennessee. The agreement and order are subject to final approval by the Court.  The Company accrued $10 million with respect to the penalty in its financial statements for the year ended January 30, 2004, and this accrual remains outstanding as of January 28, 2005.  The Company can give no assurances that the Court will approve this agreement and order.  If the agreement and order are not approved, the Company could be subject to different or additional penalties, both monetary and non-monetary, which could materially and adversely affect the Company’s financial statements as a whole.  


In addition, as previously discussed in the Company’s periodic reports filed with the SEC, the Company settled in the second quarter of 2002 the lead shareholder derivative action relating to the 2001 Restatement that had been filed in Tennessee State Court.  All other pending state and federal derivative cases were subsequently dismissed during the third quarter of fiscal 2002. The settlement of the shareholder derivative lawsuits resulted in a net payment to the Company, after attorney’s fees payable to the plaintiffs’ counsel, of approximately $25.2 million, which was recorded as income during the third quarter of 2002. The Company also settled the federal consolidated 2001 Restatement-related class action lawsuit in the second quarter of fiscal 2002. The $162 million settlement, which was expensed in the fourth quarter of 2000, was paid in the first half of fiscal 2002. The Company received from its insurers $4.5 million in respect of such settlement in July 2002, which was recorded as income during the second quarter of 2002.

Plaintiffs representing fewer than 1% of the shares traded during the class period chose to opt out of the federal class action settlement. One such plaintiff chose to pursue recovery against the Company individually.  In 2002, the Company settled and paid that claim and recognized an expense of $0.2 million in respect of that agreement.

Other Litigation .  On March 14, 2002, a complaint was filed in the United States District Court for the Northern District of Alabama ( Edith Brown, on behalf of herself and others similarly situated v. Dolgencorp. Inc., and Dollar General Corporation , CV02-C-0673-W (“ Brown ”)) to commence a collective action against the Company on behalf of current and former salaried store managers.  The complaint alleges that these individuals were entitled to overtime pay and should not have been classified as exempt employees under the Fair Labor Standards Act (“FLSA”).  Plaintiffs seek to recover overtime pay, liquidated damages, declaratory relief and attorneys’ fees.  

On January 12, 2004, the court certified an opt-in class of plaintiffs consisting of all persons employed by the Company as store managers at any time since March 14, 1999, who regularly worked more than 50 hours per week and either: (1) customarily supervised less than two employees at one time; (2) lacked authority to hire or discharge employees without supervisor approval; or (3) sometimes worked in non-managerial positions at stores other than the one he or she managed. The Company’s attempt to appeal this decision on a discretionary basis to the 11 th Circuit Court of Appeals was denied.  



61






Notice was sent to prospective class members and the deadline for individuals to opt in to the lawsuit was May 31, 2004.  Approximately 5,000 individuals opted in.  The Court has entered a scheduling order that governs the discovery and remaining phases of the case.

Three additional lawsuits, Tina Depasquales v. Dollar General Corp. (Southern District of Georgia, Savannah Division, CV 404-096, filed May 12, 2004), Karen Buckley v. Dollar General Corp. (Southern District of Ohio, C-2-04-484, filed June 8, 2004), and Sheila Ann Hunsucker v. Dollar General Corp. et al. (Western District of Oklahoma, Civ-04-165-R, filed February 19, 2004), were filed asserting essentially the same claims as the Brown case, all of which have since been consolidated in the Northern District of Alabama where the Brown litigation is pending. The Company believes that the consolidation will not affect the scheduling order or extend any of the deadlines in the Brown case.

The Company believes that its store managers are and have been properly classified as exempt employees under the FLSA and that the action is not appropriate for collective action treatment.  The Company intends to vigorously defend the action.  However, no assurances can be given that the Company will be successful in defending this action on the merits or otherwise, and, if not, the resolution could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial statements as a whole.

The Company is involved in other legal actions and claims arising in the ordinary course of business.  The Company currently believes that such other litigation and claims, both individually and in the aggregate, will be resolved without a material effect on the Company’s financial statements as a whole.  However, litigation involves an element of uncertainty.  Future developments could cause these actions or claims to have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial statements as a whole.

9.

Benefit plans

Effective January 1, 1998, the Company established a 401(k) savings and retirement plan.  Balances in two earlier plans were transferred into this plan.  All employees who had completed 12 months of service, worked 1,000 hours per year, and were at least 21 years of age were eligible to participate in the plan.  Employee contributions, up to 6% of annual compensation, were matched by the Company at the rate of $0.50 on the dollar.  The Company also contributed a discretionary amount annually to the plan equal to 2% of each employee’s annual compensation. Effective January 1, 2003, the plan was amended to allow all eligible employees to participate in the plan and to contribute up to 25% of annual compensation from their date of hire up to a maximum of $12,000 in calendar year 2003 and a maximum of $13,000 in calendar year 2004; the Company match of employee contributions was changed to a rate of $1.00 for each $1.00 contributed up to 5% of annual salary (upon completion of 12 months and a minimum of 1,000 hours of service); and the Company’s discretionary annual contribution to the plan of 2% of annual compensation was eliminated.  Effective January 1, 2005, the plan was amended to allow for catch-up employee contributions and to clarify certain provisions.  All active employees are fully vested in all contributions to the plan.  Expense for the plan was approximately $4.9 million in 2004, $2.7 million in 2003 and $5.9 million in 2002.



62






Effective January 1, 1998, the Company also established a supplemental retirement plan and a compensation deferral plan for a select group of management and highly compensated employees.  The supplemental retirement plan is a noncontributory defined contribution plan with annual Company contributions ranging from 2% to 12% of base pay plus bonus depending upon age plus years of service and job grade.  Under the compensation deferral plan, participants may defer up to 65% of base pay (reduced by any deferrals to the 401(k) Plan) and up to 100% of bonus pay and the Company matches base pay deferrals at a rate of 100% of base pay deferral, up to 5% of annual salary, offset by the amount of match in the 401(k) Plan.  Effective January 1, 2000, both the supplemental retirement plan and compensation deferral plan were amended and restated so that such plans were combined into one master plan document. Effective January 1, 2003, the plan document was amended to clarify certain provisions and to mirror the 401(k) plan employer contribution provisions that became effective on January 1, 2003, as described above. Effective November 1, 2004, the plan document was amended to modify eligibility, comply with pending federal legislation, and enhance investment offerings.  An employee may be designated for participation in one or both of the plans, according to the eligibility requirements of the plans.  All participants are 100% vested in their compensation deferral plan accounts.  Supplemental retirement plan accounts generally vest at the earlier of the participant’s attainment of age 50 or the participant’s being credited with 10 or more “years of service” or upon termination of employment due to death or “total and permanent disability” or upon a “change in control,” all as defined in the plan.  Compensation expense for these plans was approximately $0.6 million in 2004, $0.5 million in 2003 and $0.2 million in 2002.

Beginning September 2000, the supplemental retirement plan and compensation deferral plan assets are invested at the option of the participant in either an account that mirrors the performance of a fund or funds selected by the Compensation Committee of the Company’s Board of Directors or its delegate (the “Mutual Fund Options”), or in an account which mirrors the performance of the Company’s common stock (the “Common Stock Option”).  Pursuant to a provision in the November 1, 2004 amendment that was effective January 1, 2005, investments in the Common Stock Option cannot be subsequently diversified and investments in the Mutual Fund Options cannot be subsequently transferred into the Common Stock Option.

In accordance with a participant’s election, a participant’s compensation deferral plan and supplemental retirement plan account balances will be paid in cash by (a) lump sum, (b) monthly installments over a 5, 10 or 15-year period or (c) a combination of lump sum and installments. The vested amount will be payable at the time designated by the plan upon the participant’s termination of employment or retirement, except that participants may elect to receive an in-service lump sum distribution of vested amounts credited to the compensation deferral account, provided that the date of distribution is a date that is no sooner than five years after the end of the year in which amounts are deferred. In addition, a participant who is an employee may request to receive an “unforeseeable emergency hardship” in-service lump sum distribution of vested amounts credited to his compensation deferral account. Effective January 1, 2005 for active participants, account balances deemed to be invested in the Mutual Fund Options are payable in cash and account balances deemed to be invested in the Common Stock Option are payable in shares of Dollar General common stock and cash in lieu of fractional shares.  Prior to January 1, 2005, all account balances were payable in cash.



63






The Mutual Funds Options are stated at fair market value, which is based on quoted market prices, and are included in Other current assets.  In accordance with EITF 97-14 “Accounting for Deferred Compensation Arrangements Where Amounts Earned Are Held in a Rabbi Trust and Invested,” the Company’s stock is recorded at historical cost and included in Other shareholders’ equity.  The deferred compensation liability related to the Company stock for active plan participants was reclassified to stockholders’ equity and subsequent changes to the fair value of the obligation will not be recognized, in accordance with the provisions of EITF 97-14. The deferred compensation liability related to the Mutual Funds Options is recorded at the fair value of the investments held in the trust and is included in Accrued expenses and other in the consolidated balance sheets.

During 2003, the Company established two supplemental executive retirement plans, each with one executive participant.  During 2004, one of these plans was terminated in connection with the termination of that participant’s employment.  The Company accounts for the remaining plan in accordance with SFAS No. 87, “Employers’ Accounting for Pensions”, as amended by SFAS No. 132, “Employers’ Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits”, and supplemented by SFAS No. 130, “Reporting Comprehensive Income”, but has not included additional disclosures due to their immateriality.

Non-employee directors may defer all or a part of any fees normally paid by the Company to them pursuant to a voluntary nonqualified compensation deferral plan.  The compensation eligible for deferral includes the annual retainer, meeting and other fees, as well as any per diem compensation for special assignments, earned by a director for his or her service to the Company’s Board of Directors or one of its committees.  The compensation deferred is credited to a liability account, which is then invested at the option of the director, in either an account that mirrors the performance of a fund selected by the Compensation Committee (the “Mutual Fund Options”), or in an account which mirrors the performance of the Company’s common stock (the “Common Stock Option”).  In accordance with a director’s election, the deferred compensation will be paid in a lump sum or in monthly installments over a 5, 10 or 15-year period, or a combination of both, at the time designated by the plan upon a director’s resignation or termination from the Board. However, a director may request to receive an “unforeseeable emergency hardship” in-service lump sum distribution of amounts credited to his account in accordance with the terms of the directors’ deferral plan.  All deferred compensation will be immediately due and payable upon a “change in control” (as defined in the directors’ deferral plan) of the Company. Effective January 1, 2005, account balances deemed to be invested in the Mutual Fund Options are payable in cash and account balances deemed to be invested in the Common Stock Option are payable in shares of Dollar General common stock and cash in lieu of fractional shares.  Prior to January 1, 2005, all account balances were payable in cash.

10.

Stock-based compensation

The Company has a shareholder-approved stock incentive plan under which restricted stock, restricted stock units, stock options and other equity-based awards may be granted to officers, directors and key employees.



64






All stock options granted in 2004, 2003 and 2002 under the terms of the Company’s stock incentive plan were non-qualified stock options issued at a price equal to the fair market value of the Company’s common stock on the date of grant.  Non-qualified options granted under these plans have expiration dates no later than 10 years following the date of grant.

Under the plan, stock option grants are made to key management employees including officers, as well as other employees, as determined by the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors.  The number of options granted is directly linked to the employee’s job classification.  Beginning in 2002, vesting provisions for options granted under the plan changed from a combination of Company performance-based vesting and time-based vesting to time-based vesting only.  All options granted in 2004, 2003 and 2002 under the plan vest ratably over a four-year period, except for a grant made to the CEO in 2003, two-thirds of which vested after one year and one-third of which vests after two years.

Under the plan, restricted stock and restricted stock units (which represent the right to receive one share of common stock for each unit upon vesting) may be granted to employees, including officers, as determined by the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors. In addition, the plan provides for the automatic annual grant of 4,600 restricted stock units to each non-employee director.  In 2004 and 2003, the Company awarded a total of 166,300 and 50,000 shares of restricted stock and restricted stock units to certain plan participants at a weighted average fair value of $19.26 and $19.37 per share, respectively.  The difference between the market price of the underlying stock on the date of grant and the purchase price, which was set at zero for all restricted stock and restricted stock unit awards in 2004 and 2003, was recorded as unearned compensation expense, which is a component of Other shareholders’ equity, and is being amortized to expense on a straight-line basis over the restriction period.  The restricted stock and restricted stock units granted to employees in 2004 and 2003 under the plan vest and become payable ratably over a three-year period.  The restricted stock units granted to outside directors generally vest one year after the grant date subject to acceleration of vesting upon retirement or other circumstances set forth in the plan, but no payout shall be made until the individual has ceased to be a member of the Board of Directors.  Under the stock incentive plan, recipients of restricted stock are entitled to receive cash dividends and to vote their respective shares, but are prohibited from selling or transferring restricted shares prior to vesting.  Recipients of restricted stock units are entitled to accrue dividend equivalents on the units but are not entitled to vote, sell or transfer the shares underlying the units prior to both vesting and payout.  The maximum number of shares of restricted stock or restricted stock units eligible for issuance under the terms of this plan has been capped at 4,000,000.  At January 28, 2005, 3,763,451 shares of restricted stock or restricted stock units were available for grant under the plan.

During 2003, the Company also granted stock options and restricted stock in transactions that were not made under the stock incentive plan. The Company awarded 78,865 shares of restricted stock as a material inducement to employment to its CEO at a fair value of $12.68 per share.  The difference between the market price of the underlying stock and the purchase price on the date of grant, which was set as zero for this restricted stock award, was recorded as unearned compensation expense, and is being amortized to expense on a straight-line basis over the restriction period of five years.  The CEO is entitled to receive cash dividends and to vote these shares, but is prohibited from selling or transferring shares prior to vesting.  Also during



65






the first quarter of 2003, the Company awarded the CEO, as a material inducement to employment, an option to purchase 500,000 shares at an exercise price of $12.68 per share. The option generally vests at a rate of 166,666 shares on the second anniversary of the grant date and 333,334 shares on the third anniversary of the grant date, subject to accelerated vesting as provided in Mr. Perdue’s Employment Agreement or in the plan.  The option will terminate no later than 10 years from the grant date .  

Pro forma information regarding net income and earnings per share, as disclosed in Note 1, has been determined as if the Company had accounted for its employee stock-based compensation plans under the fair value method of SFAS No. 123. The fair value of options granted during 2004, 2003 and 2002 was $6.36, $5.45 and $6.15, respectively. The fair value of each stock option grant was estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option pricing model with the following assumptions:

 

2004

 

2003

 

2002

Expected dividend yield

 

 0.9

%

   

0.9

%

   

0.8

%

Expected stock price volatility

 

 35.5

%

   

36.9

%

   

35.3

%

Weighted average risk-free interest rate

 

 3.5

%

   

2.7

%

   

3.9

%

Expected life of options (years)

 

 5.0

     

3.7

     

6.5

 


A summary of the balances and activity for all of the Company’s stock option awards for the last three fiscal years is presented below:

 

Shares
Issued

 

Weighted Average
Exercise Price

Balance, February 1, 2002

 

  25,970,762 

     

$

15.65

 

Granted

 

  4,146,986 

       

15.83

 

Exercised

 

  (690,515)

       

6.90

 

Canceled

 

  (2,510,662)

       

17.35

 

Balance, January 31, 2003

 

  26,916,571 

       

15.73

 

Granted

 

  4,705,586 

       

18.39

 

Exercised

 

  (4,240,438)

       

11.68

 

Canceled

 

  (2,450,429)

       

17.76

 

Balance, January 30, 2004

 

  24,931,290 

       

16.75

 

Granted

 

  2,250,900 

       

18.88

 

Exercised

 

  (2,874,828)

       

11.87

 

Canceled

 

  (1,758,030)

       

18.97

 

Balance, January 28, 2005

 

 22,549,332 

     

$

17.42

 


The following table summarizes information about all stock options outstanding at January 28, 2005:


 

Options Outstanding

Options Exercisable

Range of

Number

Weighted Average Remaining

Weighted Average

Number

Weighted  Average Exercise

Exercise Prices

Outstanding

Contractual Life

Exercise Price

Exercisable

Price

$  4.27 - $10.68

1,107,229 

1.8

$

6.83

1,051,419

$

6.74

$10.73 - $17.31

9,268,565 

5.9

14.86

6,060,665

14.90

$17.64 - $23.90

12,173,538 

6.4

20.33

6,724,375

20.78

$  4.27 - $23.90

22,549,332 

6.0

$

17.42

13,836,459

$

17.14




66






At January 28, 2005, there were approximately 8.3 million shares available for grant under the Company’s stock incentive plan.  At January 30, 2004 and January 31, 2003, respectively, there were approximately 15.0 million and 17.0 million exercisable options outstanding.


11.

Capital stock

The Company has a Shareholder Rights Plan (the “Plan”) under which Series B Junior Participating Preferred Stock Purchase Rights (the “Rights”) were issued for each outstanding share of common stock.  The Rights were attached to all common stock outstanding as of March 10, 2000, and will be attached to all additional shares of common stock issued prior to the Plan’s expiration on February 28, 2010, or such earlier termination, if applicable.  The Rights entitle the holders to purchase from the Company one one-hundredth of a share (a “Unit”) of Series B Junior Participating Preferred Stock (the “Preferred Stock”), no par value, at a purchase price of $100 per Unit, subject to adjustment.  Initially, the Rights will attach to all certificates representing shares of outstanding common stock, and no separate Rights Certificates will be distributed.  The Rights will become exercisable upon the occurrence of a triggering event as defined in the Plan.

On November 30, 2004, the Board of Directors authorized the Company to repurchase up to 10 million shares of its outstanding common stock. Purchases may be made in the open market or in privately negotiated transactions from time to time subject to market conditions. The objective of the share repurchase program was to enhance shareholder value by purchasing shares at a price that produces a return on investment that is greater than the Company's cost of capital. Additionally, share repurchases generally will be undertaken only if such purchases result in an accretive impact on the Company's fully diluted earnings per share calculation. This authorization expires November 30, 2005. During 2004, the Company purchased approximately 0.5 million shares pursuant to this authorization at a total cost of $10.9 million.

On March 13, 2003, the Board of Directors authorized the Company to repurchase up to 12 million shares of its outstanding common stock in the open market or in privately negotiated transactions from time to time subject to market conditions. The objective of the share repurchase program is consistent with the November 2004 repurchase program as described above. This authorization expired March 13, 2005. During 2003, approximately 1.5 million shares were repurchased at a total cost of $29.7 million. During 2004, the Company purchased approximately 10.5 million shares at a total cost of $198.4 million. As of January 28, 2005, approximately 12.0 million shares had been purchased, substantially completing this share repurchase authorization.

12.

Related party transactions

 In 2002, Cal Turner, the Company’s then Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, made voluntary payments to the Company totaling approximately $6.8 million in cash.  Of such amount, approximately $6.0 million represented the value on April 10, 2002 of stock Mr. Turner acquired on April 7, 1999 and April 20, 2000 upon the exercise of stock options (net of the strike price of such options) and approximately $0.8 million represented the value of performance-based bonuses received by Mr. Turner in April 1999 and April 2000.  Mr. Turner voluntarily



67






paid such amounts to the Company because the options vested and the performance bonuses were paid based on performance measures that were attained under the Company’s originally reported financial results for the period covered by the 2001 Restatement.  Those measures would not have been attained under the subsequently restated results.  The Company recorded the approximately $6.0 million receipt as a contribution of capital, which was recorded as an increase in Additional paid-in capital included in shareholders’ equity as of January 31, 2003.  The Company recorded the approximately $0.8 million receipt as a reduction of SG&A expenses during the third quarter of 2002.

13.

Segment reporting

The Company manages its business on the basis of one reportable segment.  See Note 1 for a brief description of the Company’s business.  As of January 28, 2005, all of the Company’s operations were located within the United States with the exception of an immaterial Hong Kong subsidiary formed to assist in the process of importing certain merchandise that began operations in early 2004.  The following data is presented in accordance with SFAS No. 131, “Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information.”

(In thousands)

2004

 

2003

 

2002

Classes of similar products:

                     

Net sales:

                     

Highly consumable

$

4,825,051

   

$

4,206,878

   

$

3,674,929

 

Seasonal

 

1,263,991

     

1,156,114

     

994,250

 

Home products

 

879,476

     

860,867

     

808,518

 

Basic clothing

 

692,409

     

648,133

     

622,707

 
 

$

7,660,927

   

$

6,871,992

   

$

6,100,404

 


14.

Quarterly financial data (unaudited)

The following is selected unaudited quarterly financial data for the fiscal years ended January 28, 2005 and January 30, 2004.  Each quarter listed below was a 13-week accounting period.  Amounts are in thousands except per share data.  

Quarter

First

 

Second

 

Third

 

Fourth

2004:

                             

Net sales

$

1,747,959

   

$

1,836,243

   

$

1,879,187

   

$

2,197,538

 

Gross profit

 

512,250

     

536,980

     

553,985

     

659,977

 

Net income

 

67,849

     

71,322

     

71,126

     

133,893

 

Diluted earnings per share

 

0.20

     

0.22

     

0.22

     

0.41

 

Basic earnings per share

 

0.20

     

0.22

     

0.22

     

0.41

 
                               

2003:

                             

Net sales

$

1,569,064

   

$

1,651,094

   

$

1,685,346

   

$

1,966,488

 

Gross profit

 

451,906

     

472,830

     

516,897

     

576,496

 

Net income

 

60,332

     

59,936

     

77,903

     

100,831

 

Diluted earnings per share

 

$0.18

     

$0.18

     

$0.23

     

$0.30

 

Basic earnings per share

 

$0.18

     

$0.18

     

$0.23

     

$0.30

 




68






The second quarter 2004 net income and related per share amounts above include a favorable income tax adjustment of approximately $6.2 million which resulted from net reductions in certain contingent income tax liabilities. The fourth quarter 2003 net income and related per share amounts above include the accrual of a nondeductible civil penalty of $10.0 million related to the preliminary settlement of an SEC investigation (see Note 8). As discussed in Note 2, the Company restated its financial statements, reducing its previously reported 2003 net income by $2.0 million, which is reflected in the fourth quarter above. The third quarter 2003 net income and related per share amounts above include a favorable, non-recurring pre-tax inventory adjustment of approximately $7.8 million based upon the utilization of information provided by the Company’s new item level perpetual inventory system.


15.

Guarantor subsidiaries

All of the Company’s subsidiaries, except for its not-for-profit subsidiary whose assets and revenues are not material, (the “Guarantors”) have fully and unconditionally guaranteed on a joint and several basis the Company’s obligations under certain outstanding debt obligations.  Each of the Guarantors is a direct or indirect wholly owned subsidiary of the Company.  In order to participate as a subsidiary guarantor on certain of the Company’s financing arrangements, a subsidiary of the Company has entered into a letter agreement with certain state regulatory agencies to maintain a minimum balance of stockholders’ equity of $50 million in excess of the Company’s debt it has guaranteed, or $500 million as of January 28, 2005.  The subsidiary of the Company was in compliance with such agreement as of January 28, 2005.

The following consolidating schedules present condensed financial information on a combined basis.  Dollar amounts are in thousands.



69







 

As of January 28, 2005

 

DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION

 

GUARANTOR SUBSIDIARIES

 

ELIMINATIONS

 

CONSOLIDATED

TOTAL

                               

BALANCE SHEET:

                             

ASSETS

                             

Current assets:

                             

Cash and cash equivalents

$

127,170 

   

$

105,660 

   

$

   

$

232,830 

 

Short-term investments

 

42,425 

     

500 

     

     

42,925 

 

Merchandise inventories

 

     

1,376,537 

     

     

1,376,537 

 

Deferred income taxes

 

10,024 

     

14,884 

     

     

24,908 

 

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

 

23,305 

     

1,740,029 

     

(1,709,632)

     

53,702 

 

Total current assets

 

202,924 

     

3,237,610 

     

(1,709,632)

     

1,730,902 

 
                               

Property and equipment, at cost

 

184,618 

     

1,755,717 

     

     

1,940,335 

 

Less accumulated depreciation
and amortization

 

78,661 

     

780,836 

     

     

859,497 

 

Net property and equipment

 

105,957 

     

974,881 

     

     

1,080,838 

 
                               

Other assets, net

 

3,376,578 

     

58,373 

     

(3,405,687)

     

29,264 

 
                               

Total assets

$

3,685,459 

   

$

4,270,864 

   

$

(5,115,319)

   

$

2,841,004 

 
                               

LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

                             

Current liabilities:

                             

Current portion of long-term
obligations

$

4,399 

   

$

8,461 

   

$

   

$

12,860 

 

Accounts payable

 

1,763,024 

     

355,904 

     

(1,709,601)

     

409,327 

 

Accrued expenses and other

 

37,378 

     

296,511 

     

     

333,889 

 

Income taxes payable

 

     

69,647 

     

(31)

     

69,616 

 

Total current liabilities

 

1,804,801 

     

730,523 

     

(1,709,632)

     

825,692 

 
                               

Long-term obligations

 

190,769 

     

1,261,998 

     

(1,194,305)

     

258,462 

 
                               

Deferred income taxes

 

5,424 

     

66,961 

     

     

72,385 

 
                               

Shareholders’ equity:

                             

Preferred stock

 

     

     

     

 

Common stock

 

164,086 

     

23,853 

     

(23,853)

     

164,086 

 

Additional paid-in capital

 

421,600 

     

1,243,468 

     

(1,243,468)

     

421,600 

 

Retained earnings

 

1,102,457 

     

944,061 

     

(944,061)

     

1,102,457 

 

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

 

(973)

     

     

     

(973)

 
   

1,687,170 

     

2,211,382 

     

(2,211,382)

     

1,687,170 

 

Other shareholders’ equity

 

(2,705)

     

     

     

(2,705)

 

Total shareholders’ equity

 

1,684,465 

     

2,211,382 

     

(2,211,382)

     

1,684,465 

 
                               

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

$

3,685,459 

   

$

4,270,864 

   

$

(5,115,319)

   

$

2,841,004 

 


70







 

As of January 30, 2004

(Restated)

 

DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION

 

GUARANTOR SUBSIDIARIES

 

ELIMINATIONS

 

CONSOLIDATED

TOTAL

                               

BALANCE SHEET:

                             

ASSETS

                             

Current assets:

                             

Cash and cash equivalents

$

285,007 

   

$

60,892 

   

$

   

$

345,899 

 

Short-term investments

 

67,225 

     

1,501 

     

     

68,726 

 

Merchandise inventories

 

     

1,157,141 

     

     

1,157,141 

 

Deferred income taxes

 

15,412 

     

15,001 

     

     

30,413 

 

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

 

21,363 

     

2,323,390 

     

(2,294,717)

     

50,036 

 

Total current assets

 

389,007 

     

3,557,925 

     

(2,294,717)

     

1,652,215 

 
                               

Property and equipment, at cost

 

183,843 

     

1,525,879 

     

     

1,709,722 

 

Less accumulated depreciation
and amortization

 

81,281 

     

670,809 

     

     

752,090 

 

Net property and equipment

 

102,562 

     

855,070 

     

     

957,632 

 
                               

Other assets, net

 

3,668,873 

     

41,247 

     

(3,698,850)

     

11,270 

 
                               

Total assets

$

4,160,442 

   

$

4,454,242 

   

$

(5,993,567)

   

$

2,621,117 

 
                               

LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

                             

Current liabilities:

                             

Current portion of long-term
obligations

$

7,772 

   

$

8,898 

   

$

   

$

16,670 

 

Accounts payable

 

2,350,375 

     

323,251 

     

(2,289,835)

     

383,791 

 

Accrued expenses and other

 

48,394 

     

254,764 

     

(2)

     

303,156 

 

Income taxes payable

 

     

50,605 

     

(4,880)

     

45,725 

 

Total current liabilities

 

2,406,541 

     

637,518 

     

(2,294,717)

     

749,342 

 
                               

Long-term obligations

 

194,306 

     

1,892,342 

     

(1,821,311)

     

265,337 

 
                               

Deferred income taxes

 

5,296 

     

46,843 

     

     

52,139 

 
                               

Shareholders’ equity:

                             

Preferred stock

 

     

     

     

 

Common stock

 

168,095 

     

23,853 

     

(23,853)

     

168,095 

 

Additional paid-in capital

 

376,930 

     

1,243,478 

     

(1,243,478)

     

376,930 

 

Retained earnings

 

1,014,788 

     

610,208 

     

(610,208)

     

1,014,788 

 

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

 

(1,161)

     

     

     

(1,161)

 
   

1,558,652 

     

1,877,539 

     

(1,877,539)

     

1,558,652 

 

Other shareholders’ equity

 

(4,353)

     

     

     

(4,353)

 

Total shareholders’ equity

 

1,554,299 

     

1,877,539 

     

(1,877,539)

     

1,554,299 

 
                               

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

$

4,160,442 

   

$

4,454,242 

   

$

(5,993,567)

   

$

2,621,117 

 




71







 

For the year ended January 28, 2005

 

DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION

 

GUARANTOR SUBSIDIARIES

 

ELIMINATIONS

 

CONSOLIDATED

TOTAL

                               

STATEMENTS OF INCOME:

                             

Net sales

$

171,369 

   

$

7,660,927 

   

$

(171,369)

   

$

7,660,927 

 

Cost of goods sold

 

     

5,397,735 

     

     

5,397,735 

 

Gross profit

 

171,369 

     

2,263,192 

     

(171,369)

     

2,263,192 

 

Selling, general and administrative

 

138,111 

     

1,739,474 

     

(171,369)

     

1,706,216 

 

Operating profit

 

33,258 

     

523,718 

     

     

556,976 

 

Interest income

 

(6,182)

     

(393)

     

     

(6,575)

 

Interest expense

 

21,435 

     

7,359 

     

     

28,794 

 

Income before income taxes

 

18,005 

     

516,752 

     

     

534,757 

 

Income taxes

 

7,667 

     

182,900 

     

     

190,567 

 

Equity in subsidiaries’ earnings, net of taxes

 

333,852 

     

     

(333,852)

     

 

Net income

$

344,190 

   

$

333,852 

   

$

(333,852)

   

$

344,190 

 


 

For the year ended January 30, 2004

(Restated)

 

DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION

 

GUARANTOR SUBSIDIARIES

 

ELIMINATIONS

 

CONSOLIDATED

TOTAL

                               

STATEMENTS OF INCOME:

                             

Net sales

$

169,467 

   

$

6,871,992 

   

$

(169,467)

   

$

6,871,992 

 

Cost of goods sold

 

     

4,853,863 

     

     

4,853,863 

 

Gross profit

 

169,467 

     

2,018,129 

     

(169,467)

     

2,018,129 

 

Selling, general and administrative

 

132,445 

     

1,537,125 

     

(169,467)

     

1,500,103 

 

Penalty expense

 

10,000 

     

     

     

10,000 

 

Operating profit

 

27,022 

     

481,004 

     

     

508,026 

 

Interest income

 

(3,720)

     

(383)

     

     

(4,103)

 

Interest expense

 

25,336 

     

10,270 

     

     

35,606 

 

Income before income taxes

 

5,406 

     

471,117 

     

     

476,523 

 

Income taxes

 

6,560 

     

170,961 

     

     

177,521 

 

Equity in subsidiaries’ earnings, net of taxes

 

300,156 

     

     

(300,156)

     

 

Net income

$

299,002 

   

$

300,156 

   

$

(300,156)

   

$

299,002 

 




72







 

For the year ended January 31, 2003

(Restated)

 

DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION

 

GUARANTOR SUBSIDIARIES

 

ELIMINATIONS

 

CONSOLIDATED

TOTAL

                               

STATEMENTS OF INCOME:

                             

Net sales

$

130,152 

   

$

6,100,404 

   

$

(130,152)

   

$

6,100,404 

 

Cost of goods sold

 

     

4,376,138 

     

     

4,376,138 

 

Gross profit

 

130,152 

     

1,724,266 

     

(130,152)

     

1,724,266 

 

Selling, general and administrative

 

114,903 

     

1,316,080 

     

(130,152)

     

1,300,831 

 

Litigation settlement proceeds

 

(29,541)

     

     

     

(29,541)

 

Operating profit

 

44,790 

     

408,186 

     

     

452,976 

 

Interest income

 

(3,213)

     

(1,092)

     

     

(4,305)

 

Interest expense

 

30,143 

     

16,801 

     

     

46,944 

 

Income before income taxes

 

17,860 

     

392,477 

     

     

410,337 

 

Income taxes

 

6,634 

     

141,352 

     

     

147,986 

 

Equity in subsidiaries’ earnings, net of taxes

 

251,125 

     

     

(251,125)

     

 

Net income

$

262,351 

   

$

251,125 

   

$

(251,125)

   

$

262,351 

 





73








 

For the year ended January 28, 2005

 

DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION

 

GUARANTOR SUBSIDIARIES

 

ELIMINATIONS

 

CONSOLIDATED

TOTAL

STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS:

                             

Cash flows from operating activities:

                             

Net income

$

344,190 

   

$

333,852 

   

$

(333,852)

   

$

344,190 

 

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:

                             

Depreciation and amortization

 

17,181 

     

147,297 

     

     

164,478 

 

Deferred income taxes

 

5,516 

     

20,235 

     

     

25,751 

 

Tax benefit from stock option exercises

 

9,657 

     

     

     

9,657 

 

Equity in subsidiaries’ earnings, net

 

(333,852)

     

     

333,852 

     

 

Change in operating assets and liabilities:

                             

Merchandise inventories

 

     

(219,396)

     

     

(219,396)

 

Prepaid expense and other current assets

 

652 

     

(4,318)

     

     

(3,666)

 

Accounts payable

 

10,665 

     

11,593 

     

     

22,258 

 

Accrued expenses and other

 

(8,351)

     

43,399 

     

     

35,048 

 

Income taxes

 

4,751 

     

19,042 

     

     

23,793 

 

Other

 

(3,126)

     

(9,251)

     

     

(12,377)

 

Net cash provided by operating activities

 

47,283 

     

342,453 

     

     

389,736 

 
                               

Cash flows from investing activities:

                             

Purchases of property and equipment

 

(20,443)

     

(271,729)

     

     

(292,172)

 

Purchases of short-term investments

 

(220,200)

     

(1,500)

     

     

(221,700)

 

Sales of short-term investments

 

245,000 

     

2,501 

     

     

247,501 

 

Proceeds from sale of property and equipment

 

     

3,321 

     

     

3,324 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) investing activities

 

4,360 

     

(267,407)

     

     

(263,047)

 
                               

Cash flows from financing activities:

                             

Borrowings under revolving credit facility

 

195,000 

     

     

     

195,000 

 

Repayments of borrowings under revolving credit facility

 

(195,000)

     

     

     

(195,000)

 

Repayments of long-term obligations

 

(7,847)

     

(4,692)

     

     

(12,539)

 

Payment of cash dividends

 

(52,682)

     

     

     

(52,682)

 

Proceeds from exercise of stock options

 

34,128 

     

     

     

34,128 

 

Repurchases of common stock

 

(209,295)

     

     

     

(209,295)

 

Changes in intercompany note balances, net

 

25,586 

     

(25,586)

     

     

 

Other financing activities

 

630 

     

     

     

630 

 

Net cash used in financing activities

 

(209,480)

     

(30,278)

     

     

(239,758)

 
                               

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

 

(157,837)

     

44,768 

     

     

(113,069)

 

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year

 

285,007 

     

60,892 

     

     

345,899 

 

Cash and cash equivalents, end of year

$

127,170 

   

$

105,660 

     

   

$

232,830 

 





74







 

For the year ended January 30, 2004

(Restated)

 

DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION

 

GUARANTOR SUBSIDIARIES

 

ELIMINATIONS

 

CONSOLIDATED

TOTAL

STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS:

                             

Cash flows from operating activities:

                             

Net income

$

299,002 

   

$

300,156 

   

$

(300,156)

   

$

299,002

 

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:

                             

Depreciation and amortization

 

19,961 

     

134,496 

     

     

154,457 

 

Deferred income taxes

 

(2,102)

     

20,713 

     

     

18,611 

 

Tax benefit from stock option exercises

 

14,565 

     

     

     

14,565 

 

Equity in subsidiaries’ earnings, net

 

(300,156)

     

     

300,156 

     

 

Change in operating assets and liabilities:

                             

Merchandise inventories

 

     

(34,110)

     

     

(34,110)

 

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

 

(7,323)

     

(8,981)

     

     

(16,304)

 

Accounts payable

 

(50,489)

     

83,754 

     

     

33,265 

 

Accrued expenses and other

 

15,752 

     

44,771 

     

     

60,523 

 

Income taxes

 

4,079 

     

(25,543)

     

     

(21,464)

 

Other

 

1,610 

     

3,556 

     

     

5,166 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities

 

(5,101)

     

518,812 

     

     

513,711 

 
                               

Cash flows from investing activities:

                             

Purchases of property and equipment

 

(15,526)

     

(124,613)

     

     

(140,139)

 

Purchases of short-term investments

 

(199,950)

     

(2,000)

     

     

(201,950)

 

Sales of short-term investments

 

132,725 

     

2,000 

     

     

134,725 

 

Purchase of promissory notes

 

(49,582)

     

     

     

(49,582)

 

Proceeds from sale of property and equipment

 

39 

     

230 

     

     

269 

 

Contribution of capital

 

(10)

     

     

10 

     

 

Net cash used in investing activities

 

(132,304)

     

(124,383)

     

10 

     

(256,677)

 
                               

Cash flows from financing activities:

                             

Repayments of long-term obligations

 

(7,753)

     

(8,154)

     

     

(15,907)

 

Payment of cash dividends

 

(46,883)

     

     

     

(46,883)

 

Proceeds from exercise of stock options

 

49,485 

     

     

     

49,485 

 

Repurchases of common stock

 

(29,687)

     

     

     

(29,687)

 

Issuance of common stock, net

 

     

10 

     

(10)

     

 

Changes in intercompany note balances, net

 

384,378 

     

(384,378)

     

     

 

Other financing activities

 

73 

     

     

     

73 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities

 

349,613 

     

(392,522)

     

(10)

     

(42,919)

 
                               

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

 

212,208 

     

1,907 

     

     

214,115 

 

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year

 

72,799 

     

58,985 

     

     

131,784 

 

Cash and cash equivalents, end of year

$

285,007 

   

$

60,892 

   

$

   

$

345,899 

 





75







 

For the year ended January 31, 2003

(Restated)

 

DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION

 

GUARANTOR SUBSIDIARIES

 

ELIMINATIONS

 

CONSOLIDATED

TOTAL

STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS:

                             

Cash flows from operating activities:

                             

Net income

$

262,351 

   

$

251,125 

   

$

(251,125)

   

$

262,351 

 

Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:

                             

Depreciation and amortization

 

15,222 

     

123,368 

     

     

138,590 

 

Deferred income taxes

 

63,204 

     

17,969 

     

     

81,173 

 

Tax benefit from stock option exercises

 

2,372 

     

     

     

2,372 

 

Litigation settlement

 

(162,000)

     

     

     

(162,000)

 

Equity in subsidiaries’ earnings, net

 

(251,125)

     

     

251,125 

     

 

Change in operating assets and liabilities:

                             

Merchandise inventories

 

     

7,992 

     

     

7,992 

 

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

 

(5,605)

     

6,844 

     

     

1,239 

 

Accounts payable

 

42,617 

     

(24,197)

     

     

18,420 

 

Accrued expenses and other

 

(20,857)

     

36,126 

     

     

15,269 

 

Income taxes

 

(10,493)

     

66,951 

     

     

56,458 

 

Other

 

27,197 

     

(26,767)

     

     

430 

 

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities

 

(37,117) 

     

459,411 

     

     

422,294 

 
                               

Cash flows from investing activities:

                             

Purchases of property and equipment

 

(12,949)

     

(120,946)

     

     

(133,895)

 

Purchases of short-term investments

 

     

(2,500)

     

     

(2,500)

 

Sales of short-term investments

 

     

2,500 

     

     

2,500 

 

Proceeds from sale of property and equipment

 

270 

     

211 

     

     

481 

 

Contribution of capital

 

(317,602)

     

     

317,602 

     

 

Net cash used in investing activities

 

(330,281)

     

(120,735)

     

317,602 

     

(133,414)

 
                               

Cash flows from financing activities:

                             

Repayments of long-term obligations

 

(73,361)

     

(323,733)

     

     

(397,094)

 

Payment of cash dividends

 

(42,638)

     

     

     

(42,638)

 

Proceeds from exercise of stock options

 

5,021 

     

     

     

5,021 

 

Issuance of common stock, net

 

     

317,602 

     

(317,602)

     

 

Changes in intercompany note balances, net

 

339,338 

     

(339,338)

     

     

 

Other financing activities

 

(5,702)

     

     

     

(5,702)

 

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities

 

222,658 

     

(345,469)

     

(317,602)

     

(440,413)

 
                               

Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents

 

(144,740)

     

(6,793)

     

     

(151,533)

 

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year

 

217,539 

     

65,778 

     

     

283,317 

 

Cash and cash equivalents, end of year

$

72,799 

   

$

58,985 

   

$

   

$

131,784 

 




76







ITEM 9.

CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE


Not Applicable.

ITEM 9A.

CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

(a)

Disclosure Controls and Procedures.  The Company maintains disclosure controls and procedures that are designed to ensure that information relating to the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries required to be disclosed in the Company’s periodic filings under the Exchange Act is recorded, processed, summarized and reported in a timely manner in accordance with the requirements of the Exchange Act, and that such information is accumulated and communicated to management, including the Company’s Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure. The Company carried out an evaluation, under the supervision and with the participation of management, including the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial officer, of the effectiveness of the design and operation of these disclosure controls and procedures, as such term is defined in Exchange Act Rule 13a-15(e).  As discussed more fully in Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting set out below, management identified a material weakness relating to the Company’s internal controls that arose from the Company’s inappropriate interpretation of GAAP relating to accounting for leases and leasehold improvements. Accordingly, the Company determined to restate certain of its previously issued financial statements to reflect the Company’s correction of those accounting practices. The effects of this restatement are not material to previously reported results and have no impact on the Company’s current or future cash flows.  Based solely on the foregoing facts and circumstances, the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief Financial Officer each concluded that the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures were not effective as of January 28, 2005.

(b)

Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting.   Management of the Company is responsible for establishing and maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934. The Company's internal control over financial reporting is designed to provide reasonable assurance that the controls and procedures will meet their objectives regarding the preparation and fair presentation of published financial statements.


Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Therefore, even those systems determined to be effective can provide only reasonable assurance with respect to financial statement preparation and presentation.


Management assessed the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting as of January 28, 2005. In making this assessment, management used the criteria set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) in Internal Control – Integrated Framework.  The assessment identified a material weakness in the Company's internal control that arose from the Company’s inappropriate interpretation of GAAP relating to accounting for leases and leasehold improvements, as described more fully below. A



77






material weakness is a control deficiency, or combination of control deficiencies, that results in more than a remote likelihood that a material misstatement of the annual or interim financial statements will not be prevented or detected.


As more fully discussed in Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, the Company restated its previously issued financial statements as a result of correcting its accounting practices relating to the amortization of certain leasehold improvements and the recognition of rent expense. The restatement was technically required even though the adjustments for each individual year are not material to that year’s previously reported results and have no impact on the Company’s current or future cash flows. Near the end of its fiscal year, after reviewing numerous press releases issued by other companies and other public comments pertaining to these topics and after discussing the matter with its external auditors, the Company undertook a new review of its operating lease accounting and leasehold amortization practices. This review, together with the views on the matters expressed by the SEC in a February 7, 2005 letter to the Chairman of the AICPA Center for Public Company Audit Firms, led to the Company’s conclusion that its historical accounting practices in these areas were not in accordance with GAAP. These historical practices were specifically reviewed on several occasions in the past by the Company’s management, external auditors and Audit Committee of the Board of Directors. In addition, the Company’s practices were similar to those used by many other retail and restaurant companies. Although the Company corrected these errors prior to the filing of its Form 10-K for the 2004 fiscal year, thus remediating its only material weakness, they were not effectively remediated prior to January 28, 2005. Accordingly, the Company concluded that it had a material weakness, namely the incorrect interpretation and application of GAAP relating to the two lease-related matters discussed above.


Based on management's assessment, management concluded that, as of January 28, 2005, due solely to the material weakness related to the accounting for leases and leasehold improvements, the Company's internal control over financial reporting was not effective.


Management's assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting as of January 28, 2005, has been audited by Ernst & Young LLP, the independent registered public accounting firm who also audited the Company's consolidated financial statements. Ernst & Young's attestation report on management's assessment of the Company's internal control over financial reporting is contained below.




78






(c)

Attestation Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting.


Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting


To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of

Dollar General Corporation

Goodlettsville, Tennessee


We have audited management's assessment, included in the accompanying Management's Annual Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting, that Dollar General Corporation and subsidiaries did not maintain effective internal control over financial reporting as of January 28, 2005, because of the effect of a material weakness in the Company’s internal control that arose from the Company’s incorrect interpretation and application of generally accepted accounting principles relating to accounting for leases and leasehold improvements, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (the COSO criteria). Dollar General Corporation’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on management's assessment and an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.


We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, evaluating management’s assessment, testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control, and performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.


A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company's assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.




79






Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.


A material weakness is a control deficiency, or combination of control deficiencies, that results in more than a remote likelihood that a material misstatement of the annual or interim financial statements will not be prevented or detected. The following material weakness has been identified and included in management’s assessment. Subsequent to January 28, 2005, management concluded that its historical accounting practices relating to operating leases and leasehold amortization were not in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles due to ineffective controls over the interpretation and application of generally accepted accounting principles.  Management also concluded that such incorrect interpretation and application of generally accepted accounting principles constituted a material weakness in internal control over financial reporting as of January 28, 2005.  As a result of this material weakness in internal control, management concluded that rental expense and leasehold amortization expense, as well as the related balance sheet accounts, were understated and that previously issued financial statements should be restated. See Note 2 to the consolidated financial statements for a full discussion of the effects of these changes to the Company's consolidated financial statements. This material weakness was considered in determining the nature, timing, and extent of audit tests applied in our audit of the 2004 consolidated financial statements, and this report does not affect our report dated April 5, 2005 on those consolidated financial statements.


In our opinion, management's assessment that Dollar General Corporation and subsidiaries did not maintain effective internal control over financial reporting as of January 28, 2005, is fairly stated, in all material respects, based on the COSO control criteria. Also, in our opinion, because of the effect of the material weakness described above on the achievement of the objectives of the control criteria, Dollar General Corporation and subsidiaries have not maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of January 28, 2005, based on the COSO control criteria.


We do not express an opinion or any other form of assurance on management’s statements included in the fourth paragraph of the accompanying Management's Annual Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting.


                                              

/s/ Ernst & Young LLP


Nashville, Tennessee
April 5, 2005




80






(d)

Changes in Internal Control Over Financial Reporting .  There have been no changes during the quarter ended January 28, 2005 in the Company’s internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rule 13a-15(f)) that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.  See Management’s Annual Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting, set forth in Item 9A(b) above, for a discussion of a change in internal controls effected by management after January 28, 2005 to correct a material weakness arising from its interpretation of GAAP for operating lease accounting and leasehold amortization practices.

ITEM 9B.

OTHER INFORMATION

None.

PART III

ITEM 10.

DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS OF THE REGISTRANT

The Company makes available free of charge within the Investing section of its Internet website at www.dollargeneral.com , and in print to any shareholder who requests, the Company’s Corporate Governance Principles, the charters of the standing committees of the Board of Directors, and the Code of Business Conduct and Ethics adopted by the Board and applicable to all Company directors, officers and employees. Requests for copies may be directed to Investor Relations, Dollar General Corporation, 100 Mission Ridge, Goodlettsville, TN 37072, or telephone (615) 855-4000. The Company intends to disclose any amendments to the Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, and any waiver from a provision of that Code granted to the Company’s Chief Executive Officer or Chief Financial Officer, on the Company’s Internet website within three business days following the amendment or waiver.  The Company may elect to disclose any such amendment or waiver in a report on Form 8-K filed with the SEC either in addition to or in lieu of the website disclosure. The information contained on or connected to the Company’s Internet website is not incorporated by reference into this Form 10-K and should not be considered part of this or any other report that the Company files with or furnishes to the SEC.


The information required by this Item 10 regarding the Company’s directors, director nominees, audit committee financial experts, audit committee, and procedures for shareholders to recommend director nominees is contained under the caption “Proposal 1: Election of Directors—Who are the nominees this year,” “—What are the backgrounds of this year’s nominees,” “—Are there any familial relationships between any of the nominees,” “—What are the standing committees of the Board” and “—Can shareholders nominate directors,” all in the Company’s definitive Proxy Statement to be filed for its 2005 Annual Meeting of Shareholders to be held on May 24, 2005 (the “2005 Proxy Statement”), which information under such captions is incorporated herein by reference. Information required by this Item 10 regarding compliance with Section 16(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is contained under the caption “Section 16(a) Beneficial Ownership Reporting Compliance” in the 2005 Proxy Statement, which information under such caption is incorporated herein by reference. Information required by this Item 10 regarding the Company’s executive officers is contained in



81






Part I, Item 4A of this Form 10-K, which information under such caption is incorporated herein by reference.

ITEM 11.

EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

The information required by this Item 11 regarding director and executive compensation is contained under the captions “Proposal 1: Election of Directors–How are directors compensated” and “Executive Compensation” in the 2005 Proxy Statement, which information under such captions is incorporated herein by reference.

ITEM 12.

SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS


(a)

Equity Compensation Plan Information.  The following table sets forth information about securities authorized for issuance under the Company’s equity compensation plans (including individual compensation arrangements) as of January 28, 2005:

Plan category

Number of securities to be issued upon exercise of outstanding options, warrants and rights (a)

Weighted-average exercise price of outstanding options, warrants and rights (b)

Number of securities remaining available for future issuance under equity compensation plans (excluding securities reflected in column (a)) (c)

       

Equity compensation plans approved by security holders (1)

22,183,881

$17.53

8,311,251

 


 


Equity compensation plans not approved by security holders (2)(3)

675,470

$12.68

0

 


 


Total (1)(2)

22,859,351

$17.42

8,311,251

   


 


(1)

Column (a) represents shares issuable upon exercise of outstanding option and restricted stock unit grants under the 1998 Stock Incentive Plan (as Amended and Restated effective June 2, 2003, as Modified through August 26, 2003) (the “1998 Stock Incentive Plan”), 1995 Employee Stock Incentive Plan, 1993 Employee Stock Incentive Plan, 1989 Employee Stock Incentive Plan, and 1995 Outside Directors Stock Option Plan.  Restricted stock units are settled for shares of the Company’s common stock on a one-for-one basis.  Accordingly, such units have been excluded for purposes of computing the weighted-average exercise price in column (b). Column (c) consists of 8,311,251 shares reserved for issuance pursuant to the 1998 Stock Incentive Plan (up to 3,763,451 of which remain available for issuance in the form of restricted stock or restricted stock units).

(2)

Column (a) represents shares issuable upon exercise of outstanding option grants pursuant to the Employment Agreement (the “Employment Agreement”), effective as of April 2, 2003, by and between the Company and David A. Perdue, the Company’s Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, as well as shares of phantom stock allocated to an employee’s or a director’s account under the Company’s Compensation Deferral Plan, the Supplemental Retirement Plan and Directors’ Deferred Compensation Plan (the “Deferred Plans”). The number of shares of phantom stock allocated under the Deferred Plans for each deferral is based on the fair market value of the Company’s common stock on the date on which the shares are allocated to the accounts.  The shares of phantom stock are deemed to earn any dividends declared on the Company’s common stock, and additional shares of phantom stock are allocated on the dividend payment date based on the stock’s fair market value.  Neither the Employment Agreement nor any of the Deferred Plans have been approved by the Company’s



82







shareholders.  The number of securities remaining available for issuance under the Deferred Plans at January 28, 2005 is not determinable, since those Plans do not authorize a maximum number of securities, and is not, accordingly, included in column (c) above.  Shares of phantom stock are settled for shares of the Company’s common stock on a one-for-one basis.  Accordingly, such shares have been excluded for purposes of computing the weighted-average exercise price in column (b).

(3)

Excludes shares issuable upon the exercise of an outstanding option grant contemplated by the Employment Agreement, but made under the 1998 Stock Incentive Plan. Those shares instead are included in “Equity compensation plans approved by security holders.”


As previously disclosed, the Company granted to David A. Perdue, as a material inducement to his employment with the Company, 78,865 shares of restricted stock and an option to purchase 500,000 shares of common stock (the “Non-Plan Option”). These grants, along with another option grant under the 1998 Stock Incentive Plan, were made in accordance with the terms of the Employment Agreement.  The Non-Plan Option was granted at an exercise price of $12.68 per share and vests as to 166,666 shares on April 2, 2005 and as to 333,334 shares on April 2, 2006, subject to alternate vesting in the case of death, disability or termination of employment.  The Non-Plan Option will terminate on April 2, 2013, subject to earlier termination upon death, disability or termination of employment.  If Mr. Perdue’s employment is terminated due to death or disability, then the Non-Plan Option will immediately vest and become exercisable and will remain exercisable for a period of one year (in the event of death) or three years (in the event of disability), subject to the earlier termination of the award in accordance with its original termination date. If Mr. Perdue’s employment is terminated by the Company for any reason other than death, disability or cause or if he terminates his employment for good reason, then the Non-Plan Option will immediately vest and become exercisable and will remain exercisable for a period of three months, subject to earlier termination of the award in accordance with its original termination date. If Mr. Perdue’s employment is terminated without cause or if Mr. Perdue resigns for good reason, each within two years following a change in control of the Company, then the Non-Plan Option will immediately vest and become exercisable. If Mr. Perdue retires, he will be allowed to exercise any vested portion of the Non-Plan Option for a period of three years following such retirement, subject to the earlier termination of the award in accordance with its original termination date. If Mr. Perdue’s employment is terminated by the Company for cause, the Non-Plan Option will immediately terminate.

For purposes of the Non-Plan Option, “cause” means any of the reasons below, as determined by at least three-quarters of the entire membership of the Company’s Board of Directors (and as more fully explained in Mr. Perdue’s Employment Agreement):

·

fraud, a violation of securities trading regulations or any act resulting in an SEC investigation which, in each case, the Board determines materially adversely affects the Company or Mr. Perdue’s ability to perform his duties;

·

attendance at work in a state of intoxication or in possession of any prohibited drug or substance which would amount to a criminal offense;

·

assault or other act of violence during the course of employment;

·

conviction of any felony or misdemeanor involving moral turpitude; or

·

the continued failure to perform substantially his duties (other than a failure resulting from incapacity due to disability and excluding any failure, after good faith,



83






reasonable and demonstrable efforts, to meet performance expectations for any reason).

For purposes of the Non-Plan Option, “disability” means (as more fully described in Mr. Perdue’s Employment Agreement) a long-term disability entitling Mr. Perdue to receive benefits under the Company’s long-term disability plan as then in effect or if no long-term disability plan is in effect or if the plan does not apply to Mr. Perdue, then the inability of Mr. Perdue, as determined by the Company’s Board of Directors, to perform the essential functions of his regular duties and responsibilities with or without reasonable accommodation due to a medically determinable physical or mental illness which has lasted or will reasonably last for a period of 6 consecutive months.

For purposes of the Non-Plan Option, “good reason” means (as more fully described Mr. Perdue’s Employment Agreement):

·

assignment to duties inconsistent in any material respect with Mr. Perdue’s position, authority, duties or responsibilities in effect on April 2, 2003, or any other action which results in a demonstrable diminution of his position, authority, duties or responsibilities, all without Mr. Perdue’s written consent;

·

a reduction in base salary or target bonus level;

·

the Company’s failure to continue any pension or compensation plan or arrangement in which Mr. Perdue participates or the elimination of his participation in any of those plans (except for across-the-board plan changes or terminations similarly affecting at least 95% of all of the Company’s executives, excluding Mr. Perdue’s individual supplemental executive retirement plan);

·

relocation without Mr. Perdue’s consent to any office or location other than metropolitan Nashville, Tennessee;

·

the Company’s material breach of the agreement; or

·

the failure of any successor to all or substantially all of the Company’s business and/or assets to assume and agree to perform the Employment Agreement between Mr. Perdue and the Company in the same manner and to the same extent as the Company would be required to perform if no succession had occurred.


For purposes of the Non-Plan Option, “retirement” means either retirement from active employment with the Company on or after age 65 or retirement from active employment with the Company prior to age 65 with the Company’s express written consent and in accordance with the Company’s early retirement policy (if any) then in effect.


For a description of the material features of the Deferred Plans, please see Note 9 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.


(b)  Other Information .  The information required by this Item 12 regarding security ownership of certain beneficial owners and the Company’s management is contained under the caption “Security Ownership” in the 2005 Proxy Statement, which information under such caption is incorporated herein by reference



84






ITEM 13.

CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS

The information required by this Item 13 regarding certain relationships and related transactions is contained under the caption “Transactions with Management and Others” in the 2005 Proxy Statement, which information under such caption is incorporated herein by reference

ITEM 14.

PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTING FEES AND SERVICES


The information required by this Item 14 regarding fees paid to the Company’s principal accountant and the pre-approval policies and procedures established by the Audit Committee of the Company’s Board of Directors is contained under the caption “Fees Paid to Auditor” in the 2005 Proxy Statement, which information under such caption is incorporated herein by reference.

PART IV

ITEM 15.

EXHIBITS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENT SCHEDULES

 

(a)

Consolidated Financial Statements (See Item 8).

 

(b)

All schedules for which provision is made in the applicable accounting regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission are not required under the related instructions, are inapplicable or the information is included in the Consolidated Financial Statements and, therefore, have been omitted.

 

(c)

Exhibits:  See Exhibit Index immediately following the signature pages hereto, which Exhibit Index is incorporated by reference as if fully set forth herein.



85






SIGNATURES

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

 DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION

Date:   April 12, 2005

By:

/s/ David A. Perdue

   

David A. Perdue, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer


We, the undersigned directors and officers of the Registrant, hereby severally constitute David A. Perdue and David M. Tehle, and each of them singly, our true and lawful attorneys with full power to them and each of them to sign for us, and in our names in the capacities indicated below, any and all amendments to this Annual Report on Form 10-K filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission.  

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Name

Title

Date

     

/s/ David A. Perdue

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer (Principal Executive Officer)

April 12, 2005

DAVID A. PERDUE

 
     
     

/s/ David M. Tehle

Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial and Accounting Officer

April 12, 2005

DAVID M. TEHLE

 
     
     

/s/ David L. Bere

Director

April 12, 2005

DAVID L. BERE

   
     
     

/s/ Dennis C. Bottorff

Director

April 12, 2005

DENNIS C. BOTTORFF

 
     
     


86






/s/ Barbara L. Bowles

Director

April 12, 2005

BARBARA L. BOWLES

 
     
     
 

Director

 

JAMES L. CLAYTON

 
     
     

/s/ Reginald D. Dickson

Director

April 12, 2005

REGINALD D. DICKSON

 
     
     

/s/ E. Gordon Gee

Director

April 12, 2005

E. GORDON GEE

 
     
     

/s/ Barbara M. Knuckles

Director

April 12, 2005

BARBARA M. KNUCKLES

 
     
     

/s/ J. Neal Purcell

Director

April 12, 2005

J. NEAL PURCELL

 
     
     

/s/ James D. Robbins

Director

April 12, 2005

JAMES D. ROBBINS

 
     
     

/s/ David M. Wilds

Director

April 12, 2005

DAVID M. WILDS

 




87






EXHIBIT INDEX

3.1

Amended and Restated Charter (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended January 30, 2004, filed March 16, 2004).

3.2

Bylaws (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended August 2, 2002, filed August 28, 2002).

4.1

Sections 7, 8, 9, 10 and 12 of the Company’s Amended and Restated Charter (included in Exhibit 3.1).

4.2

Rights Agreement, dated as of February 29, 2000, between Dollar General Corporation and Registrar and Transfer Company (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K filed February 29, 2000).

4.3

Indenture, dated as of June 21, 2000, by and among Dollar General Corporation, the guarantors named therein, as guarantors, and Wachovia Bank, National Association (formerly known as First Union National Bank), as trustee (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Registration Statement on Form S-4 filed August 1, 2000).

4.4

First Supplemental Indenture, dated as of July 28, 2000, by and among Dollar General Corporation, the guarantors named therein, as guarantors, and Wachovia Bank, National Association (formerly known as First Union National Bank), as trustee (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended January 31, 2003, filed March 19, 2003).

4.5

Second Supplemental Indenture, dated as of June 18, 2001, by and among Dollar General Corporation, the guarantors named therein, as guarantors, and Wachovia Bank, National Association (formerly known as First Union National Bank), as trustee (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended January 31, 2003, filed March 19, 2003).

4.6

Third Supplemental Indenture, dated as of June 20, 2002, by and among Dollar General Corporation, the guarantors named therein, as guarantors, and Wachovia Bank, National Association (formerly known as First Union National Bank), as trustee (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended January 31, 2003, filed March 19, 2003).

4.7

Fourth Supplemental Indenture, dated as of December 11, 2002, by and among Dollar General Corporation, the guarantors named therein, as guarantors, and Wachovia Bank, National Association (formerly known as First Union National Bank), as trustee (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended January 31, 2003, filed March 19, 2003).

4.8

Fifth Supplemental Indenture, dated as of May 23, 2003, by and among Dollar General Corporation, the guarantors named therein, as guarantors, and Wachovia Bank, National Association (f/k/a First Union National Bank), as trustee (incorporated by reference to the



88






Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended August 1, 2003, filed August 29, 2003).

4.9

Sixth Supplemental Indenture, dated as of July 15, 2003, by and among Dollar General Corporation, the guarantors named therein, as guarantors, and Wachovia Bank, National Association (f/k/a First Union National Bank), as trustee (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended August 1, 2003, filed August 29, 2003).

10.1

Amended and Restated Revolving Credit Agreement, dated as of June 30, 2004, by and among Dollar General Corporation, the lenders from time to time parties thereto, Keybank National Association, Bank of America, N.A., U.S. Bank National Association, AmSouth Bank and SunTrust Bank (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended July 30, 2004, filed August 26, 2004).

10.2

Sale and Purchase Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2000, among Dollar General Corporation as Lessee and Seller, FU/DG Fulton, LLC, as Lessor, and First Union Commercial Corporation, as Head Lessor (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended February 2, 2001, filed January 14, 2002).

10.3

Sale and Purchase Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2000, among Dollar General Corporation as Lessee and Seller, FU/DG Indianola, LLC, as Lessor, and First Union Commercial Corporation, as Head Lessor (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Report on Form 10-K for the year ended February 2, 2001, filed January 14, 2002).

10.4

Lease Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2000, between FU/DG Fulton LLC, as Lessor and Dollar General Corporation, as Lessee (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended February 2, 2001, filed January 14, 2002).

10.5

First Amendment to Lease Agreement dated as of November 22, 2002, between Townsend Fulton, LLC, as Lessor, and Dollar General Corporation, as Lessee (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended January 31, 2003, filed March 19, 2003).

10.6

Lease Agreement, dated as of June 1, 2000, between FU/DG Indianola, LLC, as Lessor and Dollar General Corporation, as Lessee (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended February 2, 2001, filed January 14, 2002).

10.7

First Amendment to Lease Agreement dated as of November 22, 2002, between Indianola DG Property, LLC, as Lessor, and Dollar General Corporation, as Lessee (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended January 31, 2003 filed March 19, 2003).



89






10.8

Purchase and Sale Agreement, dated as of May 29, 2003, by and between Dollar General Corporation and Principal Life Insurance Company (f/k/a Principal Mutual Life Insurance Company) (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended August 1, 2003, filed August 29, 2003).  

10.9

1989 Employee Stock Incentive Plan, as amended (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Proxy Statement for the June 13, 1989, Annual Meeting of Stockholders).*

10.10

1993 Employee Stock Incentive Plan (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Proxy Statement for the June 7, 1993, Annual Meeting of Stockholders).*

10.11

1993 Outside Directors Stock Option Plan (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Proxy Statement for the June 7, 1993, Annual Meeting of Stockholders).*

10.12

1995 Employee Stock Incentive Plan (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Proxy Statement for the June 5, 1995, Annual Meeting of Stockholders).*

10.13

1995 Outside Directors Stock Option Plan (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Proxy Statement for the June 5, 1995, Annual Meeting of Stockholders).*

10.14

1998 Stock Incentive Plan, as amended and restated effective June 2, 2003, and as further modified through August 26, 2003 (the “1998 Stock Incentive Plan”) (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended August 1, 2003, filed August 29, 2003).*

10.15

Form of Stock Option Grant Notice in connection with option grants made pursuant to the Company’s 1998 Stock Incentive Plan (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended October 29, 2004, filed December 6, 2004).*


10.16

Form of Restricted Stock Award Agreement in connection with restricted stock grants made pursuant to the Company’s 1998 Stock Incentive Plan (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended October 29, 2004, filed December 6, 2004).*


10.17

Form of Restricted Stock Unit Award Agreement in connection with restricted stock unit grants made to employees pursuant to the Company’s 1998 Stock Incentive Plan (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended October 29, 2004, filed December 6, 2004).*


10.18

Dollar General Corporation CDP/SERP Plan (as amended and restated effective November 1, 2004) (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended October 29, 2004, filed December 6, 2004).*


10.19

Dollar General Corporation Deferred Compensation Plan for Non-Employee Directors (as amended and restated effective November 1, 2004) (incorporated by reference to the



90






Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended October 29, 2004, filed December 6, 2004).*


10.20

Dollar General Corporation 2004 Bonus Plan (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended October 29, 2004, filed December 6, 2004).*


10.21

Dollar General Corporation Supplemental Executive Disability Insurance Program (incorporated by reference to Item 1.01 and Exhibit 99 to the Company’s Current Report on Form 8-K dated December 7, 2004, filed December 8, 2004).*


10.22

Dollar General Corporation Supplemental Executive Disability Insurance Program (Pre-2005).*


10.23

Dollar General Corporation Supplemental Executive Life Insurance Program.*


10.24

Dollar General Corporation Domestic Relocation Policy for Officers.*


10.25

Summary of Director Compensation (as of January 28, 2005).*


10.26

Summary of Named Executive Officers’ Salaries (effective April 1, 2005).*


10.27

Employment Agreement, effective as of April 2, 2003, by and between Dollar General Corporation and David A. Perdue (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended May 2, 2003, filed May 29, 2003).*

10.28

Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan for David A. Perdue, effective April 2, 2003 (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended May 2, 2003, filed May 29, 2003).*

10.29

Restricted Stock Agreement, dated April 2, 2003, by and between Dollar General Corporation and David A. Perdue (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended May 2, 2003, filed May 29, 2003).*

10.30

Nonqualified Stock Option Agreement, dated April 2, 2003, by and between Dollar General Corporation and David A. Perdue (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended May 2, 2003, filed May 29, 2003).*

10.31

Employment Agreement, effective June 7, 2004, by and between Dollar General Corporation and David Tehle (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended July 30, 2004, filed August 26, 2004).*

10.32

Employment Agreement, effective March 1, 2004, by and between Dollar General Corporation and Kathleen Guion.*

10.33

Employment Agreement, effective March 15, 2005, by and between Dollar General Corporation and Susan S. Lanigan.*



91






10.34

Employment Agreement, effective March 1, 2004, by and between Dollar General Corporation and Stonie R. O’Briant (incorporated by reference to the Company’s Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended April 30, 2004, filed May 27, 2004).*

21

Subsidiaries of the Registrant.

23

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm.

24

Power of Attorney (included as part of the signature page).

31

Certifications of CEO and CFO under Exchange Act Rule 13a-14(a).

32

Certifications of CEO and CFO under 18 U.S.C. 1350.

*

Management Contract or Compensatory Plan



92





Summary of

Dollar General Corporation Supplemental Executive Disability Program

(Pre-2005)


Dollar General Corporation (the “Company”) has purchased individual disability policies for the following named executive officers: David Perdue, Chairman and Chief Executive Officer, and Stonie O’Briant, Executive Vice President of Merchandising, Marketing and Strategic Planning. These policies were purchased prior to the establishment on December 7, 2004 of the Company’s Supplemental Disability Program for officers and certain highly compensated employees. These policies will continue on an individual basis and the Company will continue paying premiums.


Prior to December 7, 2004, the Company established a supplemental disability program for officers with annual base salaries greater than $400,000. UnumProvident was the insurance provider and issued individual disability insurance policies to eligible officers.  The Company pays the premiums and also grosses up these payments to cover required taxes.  This supplemental disability program was effective for policies written prior to January 1, 2005.


This program provides a disability income benefit to at least age 65 and generally in the amount of 60% of base salary as offset by the amount of any other disability income protection provided to employees on a group or individual basis, including without limitation the Company's long-term disability plan for exempt salaried employees.  The disability insurance is subject to individual underwriting.    The specific amount of supplemental disability coverage available to eligible officers under these policies is the lesser of 60% of base salary in excess of $400,000; $5,000 per month; or the maximum amount of coverage permitted by the insurance provider based on its maximum issue and participation underwriting guidelines.  Prior to January 1, 2005, the Company's group long-term disability plan for exempt salaried employees provided a benefit of up to 60% of base salary with a maximum of $20,000 per month. Effective January 1, 2005, the maximum was reduced to $15,000 per month and a new supplemental disability program was established.





Summary of

Dollar General Corporation Supplemental Executive Life Insurance Program


Dollar General Corporation (the "Company") previously established a supplemental life insurance program for officers.  Under this program, the Company pays premiums on supplemental individual life insurance policies written by Ohio National Life Insurance Company for all officers.  The Company pays the premiums and also grosses up these payments to cover required taxes on these premiums.  The death benefit provided under this program is equal to 2.5 times annual base salary, reduced by the amount of the group life insurance benefit.  Currently, the Company-provided group life insurance plan for exempt salaried employees provides a benefit of $50,000.  The life insurance coverage offered through the supplemental life insurance program is subject to individual underwriting.


The specimen policy currently intended to be used for all policies issued after January 28, 2005 is set forth below.







We will pay the death proceeds to the beneficiary after we receive due proof that the insured died while this contract was inforce.  If the insured is living on the maturity date, we will then pay the cash surrender value to the owner.

Our home office is at One Financial Way, Cincinnati, Ohio 45242.

/s/

/s/

Secretary

President


20 Day Right To Examine The Policy:   You have a right to cancel this contract within 20 days after you receive it.  You may return it to us or to our agent for any reason within those 20 days.  The contract will then be treated as though it were never issued.  We will then refund the premiums that were paid to us.

Flexible Premium Adjustable Life Insurance Policy

Nonparticipating
Adjustable Death Benefit Payable Before Maturity Date
Cash Surrender Value, if any, Payable on Maturity Date if Insured is Then Living
Flexible Premiums Until Maturity Date
Stated Amount:  Page 3
Maturity Date:  Age 95




FORM 91-QL-2 PAGE 2





Policy Contents

Policy Specifications


Option Tables


Table of Guaranteed Maximum Cost of

Insurance Rates


General Terms And Definitions


Contract Months and Years


Maturity Date


No Lapse Premium


Notice


Option


Payee


Proceeds


Process Day


Pronouns


Proof You Can Be Insured


General Provisions


Ownership


Assignment


Beneficiary


Contract


Annual Account Report


Premiums


Payment


Net Premium


Planned Premiums


Extra Premiums


Maximum Premiums


No Lapse Guarantee


Policy Changes Affecting the No

Lapse Premium


Grace Period


Reinstatement


Benefits


Death Proceeds Choices


Changes In Coverage


Change of Proceeds Plan


Continuation of Coverage


Nonforfeiture


Cash Value


Monthly Charges


Interest Credits


Cost of Insurance


Cost of Insurance Rate


Net Amount at Risk


Determination of Values


Surrender and Cash Surrender Value


Surrender Charge


Surrender Charge On Decreases


Partial Surrender


Deferral of Surrender


Paid-up Term Insurance


Paid-up Life Insurance


Loans


Availability


Loan Value


Interest


Repayment


Termination of Contract


Claims


Payment of Proceeds


Misstatement of Age or Sex


Proceeds Protection


Incontestability


Suicide


Proceeds Payment Options


Choice of Options


Minimum Amounts


Description of Options


Proceeds at Interest


Payments for a Certain Period


Life Income


Payments of a Certain Amount


Joint and Survivor Life Income


Alternate Life Income


Death of Payee




FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 3





Policy Specifications



FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 4





This Page Left Blank



FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 5






Option Tables



FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 6






Table of Guaranteed Maximum Cost of Insurance Rates



FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 7






General Terms And Definitions

Contract Months and Years

This contract takes effect on the contract date shown on page 3.  Contract months and years are marked from the contract date.  The first day of the contract year is the contract date and its anniversaries.

Maturity Date

The policy anniversary on which you attain age 95.  We will pay you the cash surrender value on that date less any loans in effect.

No Lapse Premium

The no lapse monthly premium is shown on page 3.  The no lapse premium requirement must be met in each of the first 3 contract years or for 3 years after any increase to keep the no lapse guarantee in effect.

Notice

A notice required by this contract must be in written form acceptable to us.  A notice takes effect when signed; but it is subject to any payment made or action taken by us before we receive it.

Option

Payment of the proceeds other than in one sum.

Payee

The person to whom payments are made under an option.  If the option is a life annuity, the payee is the person on whose life the option is based.

Proceeds

The amount payable on the first of these:  (1) surrender of the contract; (2) death of the insured; or (3) the maturity date.

Process Day

The first day of each contract month.  Monthly charges and credits are made as of each process day.

Pronouns

"Our", "us", or "we" means Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation.  "You", "your" or "yours" means the insured.  If the insured are not the owner, "you", "your" or "yours" means the owner when referring to contract rights, payments and notices.

Proof You Can Be Insured

When this contract requires you to send us proof that you can be insured, the proof must be acceptable to us. We will supply forms or instructions for you to give such proof.  No new stated amount or reinstatement for which you apply will take effect until we approve your application.  We must find that you are in an acceptable risk class.  Unless we adopt other rules, your risk class must be at least as good as it was when we last approved you for insurance.


FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 8





General Provisions

Ownership

The owner has all contract rights while the insured is living.  After the insured's death, the owner only has those rights set forth in the Beneficiary and Proceeds Payment Options sections.  The owner may act without the consent of a revocable beneficiary or contingent owner.  The owner may name a contingent owner or new owner by notice to us.

Assignment

You may assign your rights under this contract as security for a loan or debt.  We are not bound by an assignment unless we receive notice of it.  The person to whom you assign your rights has a first claim on proceeds ahead of you and your beneficiaries except for irrevocable beneficiaries named prior to the assignment.

Beneficiary

You may name beneficiaries in the application or by notice to us.  Unless otherwise provided in the application or in a later writing, beneficiary designations are revocable and the owner may change them at any time.  If the owner is not the insured, the owner may name or change revocable beneficiaries by notice to us at any time up to 60 days after your death.

Beneficiaries have rights in the order named.  Contingent beneficiaries will only receive proceeds if no prior beneficiary survives you.  The rights of a beneficiary who dies before you will pass to living beneficiaries of the same class.  If no beneficiary survives you, death proceeds will be paid to the owner.

Contract

Your application and payment of premiums are your consideration for this contract.  The entire contract is your application and this policy.  A copy of your application is attached.  You represent that the statements made in your application are true as far as you know and believe.  But, you do not warrant the truth of statements made in good faith.  We cannot base denial of a claim on any statement you make unless it is contained in an attached application.

The contract cannot be changed nor our rights waived except in writing signed by one of our officers.

Annual Account Report

We will send you a report at least once each year showing, as of the date of the report: (1) the cash value; (2) the  cash surrender value; (3) interest credited since the last report; (4) premiums paid since the last report; (5) charges made since the last report; and (6) loans in effect.  We will send reports more than once a year if you ask for them.  We may charge a fee for such extra reports.

You may ask us in writing at any time for a complete proposal showing tables of cash values and death benefits based on guaranteed and current rates as well as any other necessary assumptions.  We may charge a reasonable fee for this service.


FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 9





Premiums

Payment

Your first premium is due on the contract date.  One no-lapse premium must be paid to put this contract in effect.  The first premium may be paid to our agent or sent to our home office.  Premiums after the first must be paid to our home office.  We will give you a receipt signed by one of our officers.  Premiums are payable in advance of the period to which they apply.

Net Premium

The net premium is the premium paid less any applicable state premium tax charge shown on page 6A.

Planned Premiums

You may pay planned premiums each year, or every 6 months or 3 months.  We will send you a notice of each planned premium.  We may also allow other premium payment plans.  You may change your planned premium amount, or how often it is to be paid, by sending us notice of the change.  We may limit the amount of increase in your planned premium.  Each planned premium must be at least $25.

Extra Premiums

You may pay extra premiums (more than planned) at any time prior to the maturity date.  If you have a loan, extra premiums will first be applied to reduce or pay off the loan.  We may limit the amount and number of extra premiums which may be paid.

Maximum Premiums

Premiums that can be paid under this contract can be no more than allowed by the federal law that defines life insurance.  We will set the maximum premium allowed each year.  If a premium payment would exceed this maximum, you can increase your stated amount to allow this premium.  To do this, you must apply in writing and send us proof you can be insured.  If you do not increase your stated amount, we will refund premium in excess of the maximum to you.

No Lapse Guarantee

This contract will not end in the first 3 contract years or for 3 years after any increase in the stated amount if on each process day (a) is not less than (b) where:

(a)

is the sum of all premiums paid since the contract date or any increase less any partial surrenders and less any loan amount, and

(b)

is the sum of the no-lapse monthly premiums since the contract date, or any increase including the no lapse monthly premium for the current process day.

Although we will determine each month whether or not you have met the no-lapse premium requirement, you do not have to pay premiums monthly.

Policy Changes Affecting the No Lapse Premium

The no-lapse monthly premiums will be affected by any change in stated amount or change of proceeds plan. The no-lapse premium may also be changed when a rider is added to or removed from this contract.  You will be notified of the new no-lapse premium which applies from the date of the change.


FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 10





Grace Period

A premium is due on any process day on which the cash surrender value, less loans in effect, is not enough to cover the charges then due.  The required premium will equal the amount necessary to allow the cash surrender value less loans in effect to cover 2 monthly charges.  We will mail you, and any assignee of record, notice of the amount due.  The contract will stay inforce for 61 days after the due date of the required premium, or, if later, until 31 days after notice of the amount due has been mailed, but not past the maturity date.  If you do not pay the required premium by the end of this grace period, the contract will end with no value.  We will send you a notice before the contract ends.  If death occurs during a grace period, any required premium then due will be subtracted from the death proceeds.

The contract will not lapse if the no-lapse guarantee is in effect.

Reinstatement

If this contract ends for failure to pay a required premium, you may reinstate it within 5 years if:

(1)

you apply to reinstate this contract and send us proof you can be insured; and

(2)

we approve your application; and

(3)

you pay enough premium to keep the contract inforce for at least 2 months; and

(4)

you pay the monthly charges due from the grace period; and

(5)

you pay or reinstate any loans then in effect with interest at 6% per year.

You may not reinstate this contract after the maturity date.

Benefits

Death Proceeds Choices

Plan A.  If you have Plan A, the death proceeds equal the larger of:  (1) the stated amount on the date of your death; or (2) the cash value plus a percentage of the cash value which varies with your attained age according to the table below.  Death proceeds will be reduced by any loans in effect.

Plan B.  If you have Plan B, the death proceeds equal the larger of:  (1) the stated amount plus the cash value on the date of your death; or (2) the cash value plus a percentage of the cash value which varies with your attained age according to the table below.  Death proceeds will be reduced by any loans in effect.

The stated amount is shown on page 3.


Attained

Age

 


%

 

Attained

Age

 


%

 

Attained

Age

 


%

0-40

 

150

 

54

 

57

 

68

 

17

41

 

143

 

55

 

50

 

69

 

16

42

 

136

 

56

 

46

 

70

 

15

43

 

129

 

57

 

42

 

71

 

13

44

 

122

 

58

 

38

 

72

 

11

45

 

115

 

59

 

34

 

73

 

9

46

 

109

 

60

 

30

 

74

 

7

47

 

103

 

61

 

28

 

75-90

 

5

48

 

97

 

62

 

26

 

91

 

4

49

 

91

 

63

 

24

 

92

 

3

50

 

85

 

64

 

22

 

93

 

2

51

 

78

 

65

 

20

 

94

 

1

52

 

71

 

66

 

19

 

95

 

0

53

 

64

 

67

 

18

       




FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 11







Changes In Coverage

At any time after the first contract year, you may request a change in the stated amount to increase or decrease your coverage.  The change must be at least $5,000.  If we approve the change, we will send you notice of the change.  The change will take effect on the first day of the next contract month.  We may limit you to 2 changes per contract year.

Increase.  To request an increase in the stated amount, you must apply in writing and send us proof you can be insured.  A new no-lapse guarantee will take effect on the date of increase.

Any premium paid contingent upon our approval of an increase in stated amount will be held by us, without interest, until the increase takes effect.  Premium will be applied to the increase in proportion of (a) to (b) where:

(a)

is the no-lapse premium for the increase; and

(b)

is the no-lapse premium for the original stated amount plus the no-lapse premium for all increases in stated amount.

Decrease.  To request a decrease in the stated amount, send us notice to do so.  Any decrease will be applied against prior increases in the reverse order in which the increases were made.  You may not decrease the stated amount to less than the minimum stated amount shown on page 3.  A surrender charge will be taken for decreases.

Change of Proceeds Plan

At any time after the first contract year, you may change from Plan B to Plan A by notice to us.  The stated amount will then be increased by an amount equal to the cash value on the date of the change.  At any time after the first contract year, you may change Plan A to Plan B by notice to us.  The stated amount will then be decreased by an amount equal to the cash value on the date of change.  When we change your proceeds plan, we will send you notice of the change.  You may not make a change that will decrease the stated amount to less than the minimum stated amount shown on page 3.

Continuation of Coverage

You may choose to continue your contract up to 10 years after age 100.  You must give notice to us before age 100.  The death proceeds after the maturity date will equal the cash value less any loans in effect on the date of death.

Nonforfeiture

Cash Value

The cash value is:  (1) the cash value as of the prior process day less the charges on that process day; plus (2) net premiums received since the prior process day; plus (3) interest on items (1) and (2).

Monthly Charges

The charges for a contract month are:  (1) the cost of insurance for the month (which includes the charges for any riders); plus (2) a contract maintenance charge as shown on page 6A.

Interest Credits

Each month, we will credit interest on the cash value at an effective rate of 4.0% per year.  We may apply a rate of more than 4.0% per year to any cash value greater than the amount of any loans in effect.  We may apply a rate of more than 4.0% per year to any cash value less than or equal to the amount of any loans in effect.  Interest on the net premium is credited from the date the premium is received at our home office.



FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 12





Cost of Insurance

We calculate the cost of insurance for each month as of each process day.  The cost of insurance for the initial stated amount is determined separately from the cost for each increase in stated amount.

The cost of insurance equals (1) the Cost of Insurance Rate ; times (2) the Net Amount at Risk.

Cost of Insurance Rate

The cost of insurance rate (or any change in such rate) for each stated amount is based on the Insured's: (1) sex; (2) attained age on the contract date and on the effective date of each increase in stated amount; (3) the time elapsed since the contract date and since each increase in stated amount; and (4) rate class.

We may change the cost of insurance rates.  Any change in the cost of insurance rates will be uniformly applied to all policies of this class.  We may not increase the rates to more than those shown in the table of monthly guaranteed cost of insurance rates on page 6.  The guaranteed rates are based on the 1980 Commissioners' Standard Ordinary mortality table for Smokers or Nonsmokers.

Net Amount at Risk

The net amount at risk on any process day equals the death proceeds divided by 1. 0032737 less the cash value.

If you have Plan A and the stated amount has been increased, the cash value will first be applied against the initial stated amount to determine the net amount at risk.  If the cash value is more than the initial stated amount, the excess will be applied against each increase in the stated amount in the order made.

Determination of Values

Minimum cash surrender values are calculated using the 1980 Commissioners' Standard Ordinary mortality table for Smokers or Nonsmokers with interest at the rate of 4. 0%.  A detailed statement of the way we compute cash surrender or loan values has been filed with your state insurance officials.  All values comply with state law and are at least as great as the minimum required by law.

Surrender and Cash Surrender Value

While you are living and before the maturity date, you may request the surrender of this contract by notice to us.  The surrender will take place as of the next process day.  We will then pay you the cash surrender value, less any loans in effect.  The contract will then end.  The cash surrender value is the cash value less our surrender charge.  If the surrender charge is greater than the cash value, the cash surrender value is zero.  If your contract is beyond the end of the no-lapse guarantee period and your cash surrender value is zero, your contract will lapse with no value.

Surrender Charge

We will take a surrender charge if you surrender your contract.  The surrender charge varies by contract year and is shown on page 6A.

If the stated amount is increased, there will be an additional surrender charge.  This charge will be based on your age at the time of each increase.  We will send you notice of the new surrender charge when an increase is made.  An additional surrender charge equal to one year's interest credited in excess of 4.0% may also be taken by us.

Surrender Charge On Decreases

If you decrease your stated amount, a portion of the surrender charge will be deducted from your cash value. This deduction is equal to the surrender charge for the portion of stated amount being decreased.  The surrender charge that remains will be the surrender charge that applies to the remaining stated amount.


FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 13





Partial Surrender

After the first contract year, you may surrender part of this contract for cash while the insured is still living and before the maturity date.  You may not do this more than twice in any contract year.  The amount of a partial surrender may not exceed: (1) the cash surrender value; less (2) loans in effect; less (3) enough to cover the next 2 monthly charges; and less (4) the $25 partial surrender service fee.  We will subtract the amount of a partial surrender from the cash value of each increase in the stated amount in the reverse order in which increases were made.  The cash value is reduced by the amount of partial surrender.  If you have Plan A, the stated amount is also reduced by the amount of partial surrender.

No partial surrender will be made which reduces the stated amount below the minimum stated amount shown on page 3.  We will charge a service fee of $25 for each partial surrender.  If a surrender charge is in effect, an added partial surrender charge will also be made on the amount of partial surrenders in a contract year that is more than 10% of the cash surrender value as of the end of the prior contract year.  This added partial surrender charge will equal a partial surrender ratio multiplied by the surrender charge.  The partial surrender ratio equals: (1) the amount of partial surrender in excess of 10% of the cash surrender value as of the last day of the prior contract year; divided by (2) the cash surrender value.  The surrender charge will be reduced by the added partial surrender charge.  

Deferral of Surrender

We may defer payment of the cash surrender value for a surrender or partial surrender for up to 6 months after we get your notice.  If we defer for more than a month, the cash surrender value will bear interest at the rate of 4.5% per year.

Paid-up Term Insurance

If you stop paying premiums, the contract can continue and operate as paid-up term insurance.  The monthly charges for calculating the cost of paid-up term insurance will be the same as those in effect when premiums were being paid.  The paid-up term period will run for as long as the surrender value less loans will purchase term insurance protection, but not past the maturity date.

Paid-up Life Insurance

On any process day you may use the cash surrender value less any loans in effect as a net single premium to purchase paid-up life insurance to mature as an endowment at age 100.  The insurance will begin on that process day.  The amount of insurance will be that which the cash surrender value less any loans in effect will buy as a net single premium at the insured's then attained age.  This option may not be elected if the amount of paid-up life insurance purchased would be less than $1,000.  At any time after this option is elected the cash surrender value will be the amount of paid-up life insurance times the net single premium for paid-up life insurance at the then attained age of the insured.  The net single premiums are based on the 1980 Commissioners' Standard Ordinary mortality table for Smokers or Nonsmokers and 4.0% interest.

Loans

Availability

By notice to us, you may borrow against the loan value of this contract on any process day.  We may defer payment of loans for up to 6 months after we get your notice.  We can not defer a loan to pay premiums on any contract issued by us.  Loans are made on the security of this contract assigned to us.


FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 14





Loan Value

The loan value is the cash surrender value less the sum of (1) any loans in effect plus (2) enough to cover the next 2 monthly charges.

Interest

The interest charged on loans is shown on page 6.  Interest is due in advance each year unless we agree to other terms.  When a loan is made, we will include the interest then due in the amount of the loan.  Interest not paid when due is added to the loan balance.

Repayment

You may pay back a loan at any time before we pay the contract proceeds.  Loans which have not yet been paid back will be repaid from death or maturity proceeds.

Termination of Contract

If your loan balance exceeds the cash surrender value, this contract will end 31 days after we mail notice of termination.  Such notice will be sent to you at your last known address and to any assignees of record.

Claims

Payment of Proceeds

Death proceeds will be paid within 30 days after we receive due proof of the death of the insured.

Proceeds are paid at our home office.  Payment will be made in one sum unless an option is chosen.  Surrender of the contract or proof of the interest of the claimant, or both, are required before proceeds are paid.

Death proceeds include interest at the rate of at least 4.5% per year, or any higher rate required by law, from the date of death to the date proceeds are paid or applied under an option.

Misstatement of Age or Sex

If the insured's age or sex was misstated, the death proceeds will be 1.0032737 times the sum of:

(1)

the cash value; and

(2)

the net amount at risk on the date of death multiplied by an age adjustment ratio.

The age adjustment ratio is:  (a) the cost of insurance charged on the process day nearest the date of death, divided by (b) the cost of insurance that should have been charged at the insured's true age.  In no case will the adjusted proceeds be less than the cash value plus a percentage of the cash value which varies with the insured's true attained age according to the table on page 10.

If the misstatement is found before the insured's death, we will charge from that time the cost of insurance for the insured's true age and sex based on the original stated amount.

Proceeds Protection

No one may commute, assign or encumber the proceeds or cash surrender value unless this contract so provides.  As far as allowed by law, no creditor may claim the proceeds.


FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 15





Incontestability

We may not contest this contract due to a false statement, material to the risk, which was made in your application for an amount of insurance if:  (a) the insured lives more than 2 years after such amount takes effect; and (b) the contract is inforce at the time of the insured's death.

We may contest this contract based on any false statement made about the insured's smoking status provided:  (a) the statement is made a part of this contract at or after the issue date; and (b) the insured dies within 2 years after the statement is made part of the contract.

Suicide

If the insured dies by suicide while sane or insane, we will not pay any stated amount or increase in stated amount which has been in effect for less than 2 years.  If the suicide is within the first 2 contract years, we will pay as death proceeds the cash surrender value or, if greater, the premiums you paid minus any loans or partial surrenders.  After that, we will pay the death proceeds of any coverage which has been in effect for more than 2 years.  Any premium applied to an increase which has been in effect for less than 2 years before the suicide will be refunded.

Proceeds Payment Options

Choice of Options

By Owner.  The choice or change of an option requires notice to us.  If the owner is not the insured, the owner may choose or change an option while the insured is living or up to 60 days after the insured's death.  If an option is chosen for death proceeds, the payee, or one of the payees, must be the beneficiary.  A beneficiary change revokes any option chosen for the beneficiary.

By Others.  If you did not choose an option, the beneficiary may do so.  An assignee may not choose or change an option.  Proceeds to an assignee will be paid in one sum.

Proceeds to be paid to a corporation may be applied under option 2 or 4 with the corporation, the insured or the insured's spouse or child as payee.  If we agree:

(1)

anyone else related to the insured by blood or marriage may be the payee; or

(2)

the corporation may also choose option 3 or 5 with any of these related persons as payee and with payments made to the corporation or to the payee.

Proceeds to be paid to a partnership, association, trustee or estate may be paid under an option on the same basis as for a corporation.

Minimum Amounts

If payments to a payee would be less than $25, we may pay less often so that each payment will be at least $25.

Description of Options

We will endorse this contract or issue a new contract or certificate to show the terms of any option.  The option date is the date proceeds come due or a later date which you request and we approve.  The life income options are based on the payee's sex and age.  We may require proof of a payee's age and survival.


FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 16





Proceeds at Interest

Option 1

We will hold the proceeds at interest at the rate of 4.5% per year.  We may determine and announce a higher rate from time to time.  Interest will be paid, as chosen, each year, or every 6 months, 3 months or 1 month from the option date.  Under the terms of the option, we may limit:

(1)

the payee's right to withdraw the proceeds; and

(2)

the length of time proceeds are to be held.

Interest to be paid on each $1,000 held by us will be:


Annual

 

Semiannual

 

Quarterly

 

Monthly

$45.00

 

$22.25

 

$11.07

 

$3.67


Payments for a Certain Period

Option 2

We will make equal payments for a stated number of years.  Payments will be made, as you choose, each year, or every 6 months, 3 months or 1 month.  Payment amounts are based on the option 2 table on page 5.  The first payment is due on the option date.  Under the terms of the option, we may limit the payee's right to withdraw the proceeds.

Life Income

Option 3

The first payment is due on the option date.  Payment amounts are based on the option 3 table on page 5.

Nonrefund.  We will make payments in the same amount each month while the payee is living.  No more payments are due after the payee's death.

Guaranteed Period.  We will make payments in the same amount each month for 5, 10 or 20 years, as you have chosen.  After that, we will still make payments in the same amount each month for as long as the payee is living.

Installment Refund.  We will make payments in the same amount each month until the sum of all payments equals the proceeds applied under this option.  After that, we will still pay each month for as long as the payee is living.

Payments of a Certain Amount

Option 4

We will make payments in the same amount, as you choose, each year, or every 6 months, 3 months or 1 month until all the proceeds are paid.  The amount of each payment will be as you have chosen and we have approved. Interest will be added to the proceeds at the rate of 4.5% per year on the unpaid balance.  We may determine and announce a higher rate from time to time.  The first payment is due on the option date.  The last payment will equal the unpaid balance of proceeds.  Under the terms of this option, we may limit the payee's right to withdraw the proceeds.


FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 17





Joint and Survivor Life Income

Option 5

These options are for 2 payees.  The first payment is due on the option date.  Payment amounts are based on the option 5 table on page 5.

Joint Guaranteed Period 10 Years.  We will make payments in the same amount each month for 10 years.  After that, we will still make payments in the same amount each month for as long as one of the payees is living.

Joint and Full.  We will make payments in the same amount each month as long as one of the payees is living.

Joint and 2/3.  We will make full payments in the same amount each month for as long as both of the payees are living.  After one payee's death, 2/3 of that amount will still be paid each month for as long as the other payee is living.

Alternate Life Income

You may choose other income amounts for option 3 and 5 in place of those shown on page 5.  Such amounts will be based on rates at least as liberal as the rates we charge as of the option date for a single premium immediate annuity of the same kind.

Death of Payee

If all payees have died, we will make one final payment to the estate of the last surviving payee for any amount then due.

For option 1 or 4, the amount then due will be any balance held by us. For option 2, 3 or 5, the amount then due will be the present value of unpaid guaranteed payments commuted at the rate of 4.5% per year.  We will specify the commutation rate when you choose the alternate life income for option 3 or 5.




FORM 91-QL-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation PAGE 18







Flexible Premium Adjustable Life Insurance Policy

Nonparticipating
Adjustable Death Benefit Payable Before Maturity Date
Cash Surrender Value, if any, Payable on Maturity Date if Insured is Then Living
Flexible Premiums Until Maturity Date
Stated Amount:  Page 3
Maturity Date:  Age 95




FORM 91-QL-2 PAGE 19





Endorsement

The Net Premium section of the Premiums provision is changed to read as follows:

Net Premium

The net premium is the premium paid, less the premium load shown on page 6A, less any applicable state premium tax charge shown on page 6A.


The No-lapse Guarantee section of the Premiums provision is changed to read as follows:

The No-lapse Guarantee period is shown on page 3 of this contract.  The No-lapse Guarantee period begins on the contract date.  A new No-lapse Guarantee period begins after any increase in the stated amount.  This contract will not end during this No-lapse Guarantee period if on each process day (a) is not less than (b) where:

(a)

is the sum of all premiums paid since the contract date or any increase less any partial surrenders and less any loan amount, and

(b)

is the sum of the no-lapse monthly premiums since the contract date, or any increase including the no-lapse monthly premium for the current process day.

Although we will determine each month whether or not you have met the no-lapse premium requirement, you do not have to pay premiums monthly.

As long as the cash surrender value is positive and equals or exceeds the amount of loan balance, the contract will not lapse even if you have not met the no-lapse premium requirement.

The following sentence is added to the Continuation of Coverage section of the Benefits provision:

Continuation of Coverage

We will accept no additional premiums after the maturity date.  No monthly charges are deducted from the cash value after the maturity date.


The Maturity Date section of the General Terms and Definitions is changed to read as follows:

Maturity Date

The policy anniversary on which you attain age 100. We will pay you the cash surrender value on that date less any loans in effect.

Any references to "age 95" are changed to "age 100".

The table in the Benefits provision is extended as follows:


Attained Age

 

%

96-100

 

0


OHIO NATIONAL LIFE ASSURANCE CORPORATION

/s/

/s/

Secretary

President



FORM 95-QLE-2 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation





Endorsement

Changes to Your Contract

If this contract is delivered to you in one of these states, the changes shown for your state will apply.

Montana and Oklahoma

The second paragraph of the Incontestability provision is deleted.

Montana

The second sentence of the Suicide provision is changed to read as follows:

If the suicide or self-destruction is within the first 2 contract years, we will pay as death proceeds the reserve based on the commissioner's valuation method and the mortality and interest rates given in the Nonforfeiture section or, if greater, the premiums you paid.

New Mexico

The last three sentences of the Grace Period provision are changed to read as follows:

If you do not pay the required premium by the end of this grace period, the contract will end with no value.  We will send you a notice at your last known address 30 days before the contract ends.  If death occurs during a grace period, any required premium then due will be subtracted from the death proceeds.

The contract will not lapse if the no-lapse guarantee is in effect.

Tennessee

The last sentence of the Surrender Charge provision is changed to read as follows:

An additional surrender charge equal to one year's interest credited in excess of 6% may also be taken by us during the first fifteen contract years.

Utah

The words "cash value" are changed to "contract value".  The amount of money available on surrender is the cash surrender value (*less any loans in effect) as described on page 12.

Washington

The second paragraph of the Payment of Proceeds provision is changed to read as follows:

Death proceeds include interest at the rate of at least 4.5% per year, but not less than that required by law, from the date of death to the date proceeds are paid or applied under an option.

West Virginia

In the Deferral of Surrender provision, the words "6 months" are changed to "30 days".

The following is added to the Reinstatement provision:

You need not pay any past due premium in order to reinstate.


FORM 91-QSE-4 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation/Cincinnati





Wisconsin

You may surrender Paid-up Term insurance on the same basis as provided in the Surrender and Cash Surrender Value provision.

The Incontestability provision of the Claims section is changed to read as follows:

We may not contest this contract due to a false statement, material to the risk, which was made in your application for an amount of insurance if:  (a) you live more than 2 years after such amount takes effect; and (b) the contract is in force at the time of your death.

We may contest this contract based on any false statement made about an insured’s smoking status provided:  (a) the statement is made a part of this contract at or after the issue date; and (b) the insured dies within 2 years after the statement is made part of the contract.  If the insured dies during the first 2 years, we reserve the right to contest this contract until the contract has been in effect for 2 years.

Wyoming

In the Annual Account Report provision, there is no charge for the first report each year.


OHIO NATIONAL LIFE ASSURANCE CORPORATION


/s/

/s/

Secretary

President







FORM 91-QSE-4 Ohio National Life Assurance Corporation/Cincinnati















Dollar General Corporation

Domestic Relocation Policy

Executives/ Senior Officers





1






Congratulations on your new assignment!


In addition to the challenges your new position brings, you and your family will encounter many changes as you leave familiar surroundings, find a new place to live and settle into your new location.


The relocation of employees contributes to the Company’s ability to stay flexible and competitive. For that reason, we have partnered with Prudential Relocation, as well as a number of other top rate service providers, to provide you with a program of relocation support to reduce normal move disruptions, and enable you to get settled in your new home and job as quickly as possible.


This Relocation Guide outlines the services made available to you to help facilitate your move, including selling your current residence and finding a new community and home.


Please take the time to read through this guide and familiarize yourself with the policy and Prudential Relocation’s services before you begin planning your relocation. Recognizing that relocating can be a disruptive time, the Company, through your designated Relocation Counselor will assist you and your family throughout your move.


Our best wishes for success in your new location.



2































TABLE OF CONTENTS



Summary of Benefits

4


Introduction

5


Relocation Administration

7


Relocation and Transition Expenses

9


Home Sale Assistance Program

11

Marketing Assistance

13

Appraised Value Offer

16

Amended Value Sale

20

Independent Sale

22


Renters’ Assistance

23


Destination Services

24


Home Purchase Closing Cost Assistance

25


Moving to the New Location

26


Tax Assistance

29






3





SUMMARY OF BENEFITS


Provision

Description

Eligibility

Current or newly hired, full-time, salaried, executive-level employees and senior officers; homeowner or renter

Relocation and Transition Expenses

*

A Miscellaneous Expense Allowance of 5% of your new base salary to cover incidental expenses associated with your move not otherwise covered by this policy

*

House hunting expenses will be reimbursed for two (2) trips totaling seven (7) days for you and your spouse or one additional household member and for your children

*

Temporary living expenses reimbursed for up to 60 days

Home Sale Assistance

*

Marketing Assistance

*

Appraised Value Offer

*

Amended Value Sale

*

Independent Sale

Destination Services

Company’s relocation program offers you professional homefinding counseling through Prudential

Home Purchase Closing Cost Assistance

*

Available to current homeowners and renters

*

Company reimburses reasonable and customary home purchase expenses plus up to 1% for loan origination fees

Renters’ Assistance

Company will reimburse up to two months’ rent for any combination of lease cancellation/duplicate rent

Moving to the New Location

*

Normal family household goods moved via van line plus up to $75,000 in carrier insurance

*

Mileage reimbursed for driving up to two automobiles to the new location; in lieu of driving, the Company will pay to ship your second automobile if distance exceeds 300 miles

*

Storage for up to 60 days

Tax Assistance

Gross-up provided for most non-deductible relocation expenses including federal, state and FICA taxes



4





INTRODUCTION


On the Move…

This handbook has been designed to help you understand Dollar General’s relocation program and to assist you and your family in relocating as quickly as possible with minimal inconvenience.  You are encouraged to carefully read this handbook in its entirety.  Recognizing that relocating can be a disruptive process, the Company and Prudential Relocation will assist you and your family throughout your move.


Eligibility

The relocation program was developed to facilitate the movement of current, full-time, salaried, executive-level employees or senior officers and who are requested to relocate by the Company and designated by the Company to receive the benefits described in this handbook.


In order to be eligible for relocation as described in this handbook, your relocation must meet the IRS 50-mile distance test.  The distance between your former residence and your new job site must be at least 50 miles greater than the distance between your former residence and your former job site.


Family

Your family members eligible for assistance under this policy include your spouse and your dependent household members.  In the event an additional member of your household is asked to relocate by the Company, you are eligible to receive only one set of benefits.


Time Limit

You are eligible for the benefits extended in this handbook for up to 12 months following your effective date of transfer. All expense reports related to your relocation are required to be submitted within 90 days of the date incurred within this 12-month period.


Disclaimer

The Company has the sole right at any time to revise, amend or discontinue this policy.  This policy shall not be considered or construed as an employment contract and does not constitute a guarantee of employment for any minimum or specified period of time.


Policy Exceptions

The Vice President of your department must approve any exception to this policy, in writing.  If you feel an exception is needed, please contact the Human Resources department (Relocation) so that we may help you with your request.



5







Prudential Relocation Center

Prudential Relocation Center is a customized and secure private Internet site that provides you with “anytime” access through any Internet connection.  


You will be able to:

*

Inform the relocation service team of your priorities and preferences through an online needs assessment.

*

Utilize the interactive community finder to focus your house hunting search.

*

Take a secure, virtual tour of your destination area at your convenience from your home or office—even before accepting the transfer.

*

Refer to a customized online profile for the status of your relocation, service policy, and a library of advice on every aspect of the moving process.

*

Access interactive timeline tools, planners, and mortgage calculators.




6





RELOCATION ADMINISTRATION


Upon notification of your relocation, you will have a personal Relocation Counselor as your main point of contact throughout your move.  Your Relocation Counselor will guide you through each step of the relocation process, answer your questions, and help coordinate all aspects of your move.  Listed below are highlights of the services your Relocation Counselor will provide to you:

*

general information,

*

expense report reimbursements,

*

disposition of your present home,

*

assistance in finding a new residence,

*

moving your household goods,

*

moving you and your family to the new location, and

*

assistance with air travel arrangements when applicable.


We encourage you to become fully involved in your move and work closely with the professionals who have been made available to assist you throughout the relocation process.  By working closely with your Relocation Counselor, you will be able to effectively manage your move.


Forms to Complete

Our goal is to have a relocation process that is as simple and easy to use as possible.  Therefore, there are only two steps that you must complete before receiving your relocation benefits.


Step 1.  

Complete and return the Relocation Initiation Form

The Relocation Initiation Form provides us with important information to pass on to the moving company and to Payroll/Accounts Payable for relocation check requests.


Step 2.  

Complete and return the Employee Reimbursement Form.

The Employee Reimbursement Form states that you have read Dollar General’s Relocation policy and understand that you are responsible for any expenses not covered under the policy.  This form may also have a reimbursement schedule you would follow to pay back a pro-rated share of your relocation benefits should you leave the company within a year of relocation.


Both of these forms can be mailed or faxed to the following:

Human Resources Relocation

100 Mission Ridge

Goodlettsville, TN  37072

Fax (615) 855-5376



7







Expense Reimbursement

Most ordinary expenses involved in moving from one location to another are covered under this policy.  Any questions of interpretation should be discussed with your Relocation Counselor before you take action.


All relocation expenses must be submitted on the Relocation Expense Report Form (will be provided to you by Prudential) and must not be combined with regular business expenses.  In order to determine the federal and state tax liability for reimbursed expenses, all relocation expenses must be reported accurately.


Where relocation-related expenses are specifically reimbursable, consistent guidelines apply.  

*

All reimbursable expenses must be reasonable and appropriate.

*

All relocation benefits are reflected in U.S. dollars.

*

All reimbursable moving expenses must be incurred within 12 months from the date of transfer and submitted for payment within 90 days from the date the expense is incurred.

*

Only expenses specifically outlined in the policy will be reimbursed.

*

You must submit original receipts for reimbursement.  Your completed expense reports together with your original receipts should be forwarded directly to your Prudential Relocation Counselor.

*

It is important not to include any business expenses on relocation expense forms.



8





RELOCATION AND TRANSITION EXPENSES


Miscellaneous Expense Allowance

The Company will provide you with 5% of your new base salary to cover many of the incidental expenses not specifically reimbursed under this policy, which may occur as a direct result of your transfer:


*

driver’s licenses and automobile registrations in the new location,

*

utility deposits,

*

shipment of pets,

*

cleaning or maid service (new or old location),

*

non-refundable tuition, memberships, club dues or subscriptions,

*

piano tuning,

*

tips to movers,

*

drapery and carpet installation or alterations,

*

television or cable installation or adjustments,

*

overnight mail charges,

*

tax consulting,

*

items unique to your personal move not covered by this policy,

*

disassemble/reassemble playground, gym equipment, swimming pools, and similar items.


Tax Assistance

Gross-up will not be provided for the Miscellaneous Expense Allowance.


HouseHunting

Dollar General will provide you and your spouse or one additional household member and your children with two (2) house hunting/apartment hunting trips for a total of seven (7) days.  The House Hunting Trip will include the following:


*

Hotel accommodations for a maximum six (6) nights.

*

Mileage reimbursement at current Company rate if personal vehicle is driven.

*

Reimbursable meal expenses not to exceed $25.00/day per adult, $15.00/day per child.

*

Your Prudential Relocation Counselor will assist you with air travel reservations when applicable.



Tax Assistance

Gross-up will be provided for residence hunting expenses.




9







Temporary Living

Temporary Living Assistance is intended only for short-term living arrangements at the new location and must be approved by your supervisor.  Dollar General will reimburse you for up to 60 days of temporary living expenses.  Temporary living assistance includes the following:


*

Lodging for employee only

*

Meals for employee only (not to exceed $25.00/ day)


If you require temporary living assistance please contact your Prudential Relocation Counselor at least two weeks in advance.  He or she will be happy to help you make arrangements and answer any questions you may have.


Return Trip

If you are required to report to work in your new location prior to your family’s final move, you will be eligible to receive coverage of travel expenses for one (1) return trip home during your temporary living period. One family member may visit you in the new location in lieu of a return trip. Your Prudential Relocation Counselor will assist you with air travel reservations when applicable.


Tax Assistance

Gross-up will be provided for temporary living and return trip expenses.



10





HOME SALE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM



Your Prudential Relocation Counselor will provide you with the necessary expertise to facilitate the sale of your home through the services described below.


Home Eligibility

A home eligible for home sale assistance is any completed single-family or two-family residence, including a condominium, that is used as your principal residence and that is owned by you, your spouse, any of your dependents residing in the same household, or any combination of those persons at the time you are asked to relocate.  This also includes land customarily considered part of a residential lot and all personal property normally sold with a residence according to local custom.  If your home does not meet these eligibility guidelines, you may qualify for reimbursement of certain home sale commission expenses if you sell your primary residence on your own (Independent Sale, page 22).


Homes considered ineligible for home sale assistance include, but are not limited to, the following:


*

cooperative apartments,

*

mobile homes,

*

vacation/secondary homes,

*

investment properties,

*

homes with excessive acreage (+5 acres),

*

homes that are partially completed or under substantial renovation,

*

homes ineligible for conventional financing,

*

houseboats,

*

homes deemed ineligible through building inspections, and

*

vacant lots appraised as contributory value only.

If you have any questions regarding your home’s eligibility, please contact your Relocation Counselor prior to beginning the relocation process.





11







Overview

Marketing Your Home

The home sale process will begin with listing your home.  Your Relocation Counselor will help you select a qualified real estate agent and together they will determine selling strategies targeted to help you receive the best possible offer for your home. The advantage to successfully marketing your home and selling to an outside buyer is that you may receive a greater cash return than the Appraised Value Offer.  


You are required to speak with your Relocation Counselor prior to taking any steps to list or market your home. You are required to market your home for a minimum of 90 days from the date your home is listed with a real estate agent.


Appraised Value Offer

If you have not sold your home 30 days after listing your home, two independent appraisers will appraise your home to determine the Appraised Value Offer.  This offer will be your “safety net” providing you with a guaranteed price, should your home not sell on the open market.  Your Appraised Value Offer will be available to you for 60 days.


Amended Value Sale

If you receive a qualified offer on your home from an outside buyer as described on page 20, you have an opportunity to “amend” the Appraised Value Offer from Prudential Relocation to reflect your buyer’s offer.  



12







Marketing Assistance

As soon as the Company authorizes your relocation, your Relocation Counselor will contact you to explain the first step—the listing and marketing of your home.  Placing your home on the market as advantageously as possible is a critical element in successfully marketing your home.  Throughout the home sale process, your Relocation Counselor will continuously track your agent’s efforts to market your home.  The goal of these efforts is to help you obtain the best offer for your home within a reasonable time frame.


Your Relocation Counselor’s objectives are to:


*

help you identify a qualified and active broker to assist you in marketing and listing your home in a highly effective manner;

*

work with your real estate agent to develop a strategic marketing plan to sell your home at the best possible market value;

*

in conjunction with your real estate agent, suggest any minor repairs and/or improvements that will increase the marketability of your home; and

*

work with you throughout the process of you selling your home.

 

How the Marketing Process Works…

The following is a step-by-step process of marketing assistance services provided by your Relocation Counselor.


Agent Selection

Your Relocation Counselor will place a referral with two (2) area real estate agents who will visit your home and prepare a complete Employee Relocation Council (ERC) Market Analysis.  If you would like to designate a particular real estate agent that has not been recommended, please notify your Relocation Counselor.  As long as the real estate agent agrees to the program’s requirements, he or she will be able to work with you as one of your two selected agents.  You may not utilize or ask to have qualified any real estate agent that is a family member; i.e., mother, father, brother, sister or in-laws.  If you have no preference or are not familiar with local brokers, your Relocation Counselor will assist you in the selection.


Market Analysis

The two selected real estate agents will be asked by your Relocation Counselor to complete a market analysis on your home that will be used to prepare a marketing strategy.  The market analysis will describe the current marketplace along with the agent’s opinion of the most probable sales price for your home.  The analysis also contains a suggested sales action plan with recommendations for preparing your home for optimum market attention.



13







Listing Your Home

Your Relocation Counselor will ask you to select one real estate agent from the two you have interviewed.  He or she will then work with you and your selected agent to develop a marketing strategy and establish a list price that is both attractive and realistic in the local market.


You are required to list your home within 110% of the most likely sales price as indicated on the Broker’s Market Analysis (BMA) prior to the appraisal process.  Once you have received your Appraised Value Offer, you are then expected to list your home within 110% of the Appraised Value Price.  You are required to list your home for a minimum of 90 days from the initial list date before you are eligible to accept the Appraised Value Offer.


Listing Exclusion Clause

When you speak with your Prudential Relocation Counselor, he or she will discuss the necessity of including the following language in the listing agreement with your broker. The reason for this clause is to allow for cancellation of the listing agreement if necessary for Prudential to close with the buyer.  This clause is considered “standard operating procedure” among agents who work with Relocation Counselors and those who list homes for corporate transferees.  The following Exclusion Clause should be attached as an addendum to the Listing Agreement.  


“In the event of any conflict or inconsistency between this Addendum and the Listing Agreement, the terms of this Addendum shall control.

 

It is understood and agreed that regardless of whether or not an offer is presented by a ready, willing and able buyer:

 

1.

No commission or compensation shall be earned by, or be due and payable to, broker until the sale of the property has been consummated between seller and buyer, the deed delivered to the buyer and the purchase price delivered to the seller; and

 

2.

The seller reserves the right to sell the property to Prudential Relocation or to: ____________

 

(individually and collectively a “Named Prospective Purchaser”) at any time.  Upon the execution by a Named Prospective Purchaser and me (us) of an Agreement of Sale with respect to the property, this listing agreement shall immediately terminate without obligation of my (our) part or on the part of any Named Prospective Purchaser to either pay a commission or to continue this listing.”

     

Real Estate Agent

 

Date

     

Seller

 

Date

     

Seller

 

Date



14







Monitoring the Marketing Process

Your Relocation Counselor will work with you and your real estate agent throughout the marketing process to ensure maximum exposure for your home, provide feedback on the marketing process, and recommend strategy modifications, if needed.  


Negotiating a Sale


When you have an interested buyer and receive an offer, your Relocation Counselor will be a valuable resource as you negotiate a price and a contract of sale.  You must submit ALL offers received to your Relocation Counselor for review and consideration. DO NOT SIGN a contract (or any other document) with the buyers or take any money as a deposit from the real estate agent or prospective buyer.


Finalizing a Sale

Your Relocation Counselor will handle the details of the real estate transaction once the terms of the sales agreement have been finalized.





15







Appraised Value Offer

Your decision to relocate should not be hampered by concerns about selling your home.  Prudential Relocation will assist you by making an offer to purchase your home at a value established by independent fee appraisers.   The appraisal process will begin 30 days after listing and marketing your home.


Appraiser Selection

When you begin the appraisal process, you will be given a list of appraisers in your area and asked to select two (2) appraisers from this list.  You are encouraged to interview the appraisers to assist in making your decision.  If you do not feel qualified to make the selection, ask your real estate agent for guidance or your Relocation Counselor can assist you.


Once you’ve made your selection, please contact your Prudential Relocation Counselor.  He or she will call the appraisers and request they contact you directly to arrange a convenient time for an inspection of your home.


Appraisals

An appraisal is an estimate of the anticipated sales price of your home over a reasonable selling period.  Appraisers estimate value primarily by comparing your home to the sales of similar properties making detailed adjustments for the differences between those properties and your home.  The appraisers consider location, size, age, condition, and marketability.


When the appraisers arrive to inspect your home, you should be prepared to discuss any facts that may be important in determining the value of your home:


*

any improvements you have made to the home that may or may not be visible to the appraisers; and

*

any information on similar homes that have recently sold in your area.

Your home will be appraised in “as is” condition, so it is important your home shows favorably to maximize the appraised value and resale efforts. Your Relocation Counselor and your real estate agent will assist in suggesting specific fix-up items to help maximize your marketing efforts.


The appraisers may also ask for a copy of the land survey and a copy of the title policy that you received when you closed on your home.  They will need these items to obtain the correct legal description.



16








Determining the Appraised Value Offer

Your Appraised Value Offer will equal 98.5% of the average of two independent appraisals.  However, if the variance between the two appraisals is greater than 5% of the higher amount, a third appraisal will be ordered.  In this case, your offer will be determined by averaging the two closest appraisals.


Your Relocation Counselor will present you with your Appraised Value Offer once the inspection and appraisal reports have been received and reviewed.  Your home will have to pass all inspections and/or you must satisfactorily remedy any deficiencies before your offer is finalized.  The entire process should be completed within 30 days from the date of the last inspection.  


You are required to list your home at no more than 110% of the Appraised Value Offer.  This may require you to make an adjustment to your current list price.


Title Search

In addition to arranging for the appraisals and inspections, a title search will be initiated in order to prepare for closing.  You may need to be involved in clearing any title issues should they appear on the title report.  Please inform your real estate agent Prudential is bringing the title up-to-date.  This can avoid a duplicate title search.  Often an agent will arrange for a title search upon notification from a lender of a buyer’s loan approval.


Offer Period

Your Relocation Counselor will call you with your Appraised Value Offer and outline the timing and process of the home sale program. The Appraised Value Offer has a 60-day acceptance period—60 days to continue marketing your home knowing you have a set “safety net”.  Your 60-day acceptance period begins the day your Contract of Sale is postmarked.  You may accept the appraised value offer at any time after marketing your home for 60 days.


Home Sale Program Timeline


[Graphic omitted]




17








You are required to market your home for 90 days from the list date before you are able to accept the Appraised Value Offer.


Accepting the Appraised Value Offer

If you are unable to sell your home during the 60-day offer period and accept the Appraised Value Offer, you and your spouse should sign the Prudential Contract of Sale and return both copies to your Relocation Counselor along with the other supporting documents.  Your execution of the Contract of Sale is a legal transaction.  You will need to sign and notarize the Contract of Sale and other related documents.


The signed Prudential Contract of Sale and related documents must be received by your Relocation Counselor on or prior to the expiration date of your offer.  The contract will be dated on the day all necessary documents are completed and signed by you and your Relocation Counselor.  


Vacating the Home

You have 60 days from the date you sign the Prudential Relocation Contract of Sale in which to vacate the property, provided a resale closing does not occur sooner.  If you cannot move within 60 days, please let your Relocation Counselor know and you may be granted additional time to vacate, if circumstances warrant.


After you and Prudential have signed the Contract of Sale, you will continue to be responsible for the costs of maintenance, repairs, utilities, insurance, etc., until you actually vacate.  Prior to vacating, you will be expected to cooperate fully with all attempts by Prudential to market the home by allowing prospective purchasers to view the premises by appointment during reasonable hours.


From the date you vacate, Prudential Relocation will make all future mortgage, tax, and other carrying payments on your home.  It will also assume payment of maintenance and utility costs.  Your equity statement will reflect mortgage interest through your executed Prudential Relocation contract or vacate date, whichever comes last.  



18







Utilities

Since sudden cold weather can cause damage due to freezing, do not turn off any utilities when you vacate the home.  The utilities must be left in your name until you contract with Prudential or vacate the home, whichever is later.  At that time, you should request final readings from the utility companies serving your home.  Your Relocation Counselor will instruct your real estate agent to transfer the utilities into the real estate company’s name until the home closes with new buyers. The day you vacate is customarily the date utilities are transferred to the real estate company.  If you receive a utility bill covering a period of time when payment was not your responsibility, please submit the invoice to your Relocation Counselor for payment.


Insurance

You will need to cancel your homeowner’s insurance policy effective when Prudential signs the Contract of Sale or you vacate, whichever is later.  Any refund due to you from the insurance company will be paid directly to you.  Make note to discuss this with your insurance agent and follow-up if necessary.


If you are vacating your home prior to contracting with Prudential Relocation, contact your insurance agent to arrange coverage during any periods the home will be unoccupied.   Most homeowner’s insurance policies state coverage is void if the dwelling is unoccupied for a specific period of time.



19







Amended Value Sale

Achieving an Amended Value Sale is of benefit to you and the Company.  The Company avoids the significant expense of purchasing, maintaining, and reselling your home through Prudential Relocation and you receive the highest possible price for your home.


If at any time during your marketing period, you receive an offer through the efforts of your real estate agent, you must submit the offer to your Relocation Counselor. DO NOT SIGN a contract (or any other document) with the buyers or take any money as a deposit from the real estate agent or prospective buyer.


Advantages of an Amended Value Sale


*

You may receive a greater cash net return than the Appraised Value Offer.

*

You will be relieved of the responsibilities of property ownership upon vacate or contract date with Prudential Relocation, whichever is later.

*

You will be relieved of the necessity of closing with the buyer.

*

After contracting with Prudential Relocation, you will be assured of receiving the net proceeds based upon the Amended Value Sale even if the original sale falls through and does not close.


Analyzing the Offer

Your Relocation Counselor will review the terms of the offer in an effort to determine whether the offer is bona fide (made in good faith), and to confirm that it is not subject to the sale of the buyer’s property, does not contain any unusual or unreasonable terms, and is not subject to interim financing.


Amending the Contract of Sale

Once the final offer has been approved, your Relocation Counselor will ask you to “amend” the amount in your Prudential Contract of Sale to reflect 98.5% of the buyer’s offer and to sign and return the Contract of Sale.  




20







Buyer’s Offer Less Than Appraised Value Offer

At its discretion, the Company may also accept offers of at least 97% of your Appraised Value Offer.  You will remain eligible to receive your equity calculated based on the Appraised Value Offer.


Closing an Amended Value Sale

Prudential Relocation will acquire your home, according to the terms of the amended Prudential Contract of Sale with you.  Prudential will also fully honor the terms of the Purchase Agreement with the buyers.


Prudential Relocation will make every effort to close the transaction with the buyer.  However, since Prudential Relocation has already purchased your home, you will not be impacted if the sale to the buyer is not eventually consummated.  Your equity payment will be based upon the Amended Value Sale Price.


Responsibility for your property remains with you until you contract with Prudential or vacate, whichever is later.  This includes maintenance of your home, payments for utilities, mortgage, taxes, and premiums for insurance.


Equity

Your equity is calculated as of the Prudential contract date or your scheduled vacate date, whichever is later, and is based upon 98.5% of the sale price or guaranteed offer price, whichever is greater.  You will need to coordinate the timing of your equity check with your Relocation Counselor. You may be eligible to receive an equity advance once you have signed the Prudential Contract of Sale and when there is a specific need for funds to close on a new home in the destination area.


It is important to note that certain items are not covered under the policy and will be deducted from your final equity, if you have agreed to any of these additional seller’s expenses:


*

repairs and improvements requested by the buyer;

*

buyer’s closing costs;

*

homeowner warranties;

*

buyer’s incentives;

*

real estate commission above the standard rate for your area;

*

closing dates beyond 60 days of vacating or contracting with Prudential.





21







Independent Sale

If your home is considered ineligible for Prudential’s Home Sale Assistance Program as set forth on page 11 ( Home Eligibility ) or you elect to sell your home independently prior to initiation into Prudential’s Home Sale Assistance Program, you may be eligible to receive direct reimbursement of standard and actual real estate commission expenses when you sell your home on your own. Contact your Prudential Relocation Counselor to determine if your home qualifies for this home sale option.


If your home is eligible for Prudential’s home sale assistance and you sell your home on your own, the Company will not provide tax assistance for your home sale commission expenses.


Reimbursement of Expenses

Real estate commission at the prevailing rate in your current location (maximum of 6%) will be reimbursed if you sell your home independently within twelve (12) months of your effective date of transfer.  Reimbursed expenses include:


Discount points incurred through negotiation with FHA, VA and conventional financing are not reimbursable.


Tax Assistance

You will receive tax assistance for home sale commission expenses only if your home is ineligible for the Home Sale Assistance Program.   If you choose to sell your home on your own, no tax assistance will be provided to you.




22





RENTERS’ ASSISTANCE


Lease Cancellation

If you are presently renting your home or apartment, you should immediately notify your landlord or lease holder of your move to avoid or minimize penalty charges.  You should attempt to obtain a written waiver of any provisions of the lease requiring fees or penalties due to your transfer.  The Company asks that you make every effort to minimize the penalties by making the best possible arrangements with your landlord.


Should you be required to pay a penalty, the Company reimburses up to a maximum of two (2) months’ rent for any combination of lease termination penalty charges, forfeiture of lease deposit, and/or duplicate rent on your former home or apartment.  If necessary, your Relocation Counselor can assist you with lease cancellation arrangements.


New Lease Agreement

A new lease should be examined carefully before it is signed.  You should negotiate a cancellation clause that would give you the right to cancel the lease without penalty after giving 30 days notice, in the event of a company-initiated transfer.


Sample Clause:

If tenant’s employer relocates tenant to a location more than fifty (50) miles from the premises that are the subject of this lease, this lease will be automatically terminated without further liability at any time.  Tenant agrees to give landlord at least 30 days notice of his/her intention to terminate this lease along with proof of such transfer of employment.


Tax Assistance

Gross-up will be provided for renters’ assistance reimbursements.



23





DESTINATION LOCATION


Planning Your House Hunting Trip

Whether you are a homeowner or a renter, selecting a new community and home is one of the most important decisions you will make as a result of your job transfer.  The Company’s relocation program offers you professional homefinding counseling through Prudential Relocation.  The Company encourages you to take advantage of this valuable service.


Your Relocation Counselor will discuss your family’s specific needs, preferences, and lifestyle.  After review of your requirements, your Relocation Counselor will select a local real estate professional who is experienced in the areas of interest to you.


Remember to contact your Relocation Counselor prior to contacting any real estate agent in the new location.


Your Relocation Counselor and real estate agent will work together to organize your house hunting trip so it is productive.  By planning in advance, the agent will be prepared to take you on area tours and discuss items of interest to you and your family.  Preparation gives you a better chance of quickly finding a residence to fit your needs at a price you can afford.


Once your real estate agent is contacted, he or she will provide the following information:


*

schools, churches, etc.,

*

commuting times,

*

child and elder care services, and

*

pre-selected homes for viewing.


If you are a current homeowner, you should delay house hunting in the new location until you have an estimated value on your present home and you have been pre-qualified by a mortgage lender.  Home purchase decisions made with unrealistic expectations of current equity may result in over-commitment at the new location.


Internet Home Search

Although the Internet can be a useful tool to gain information on housing in the new area, keep in mind you need to use the approved real estate agent assigned to you to obtain information or to view any home you find on the Internet.  This will avoid confusion as to which agent you are working with and any possible real estate commission disputes.



24







Home Purchase Closing Cost Assistance

If you are purchasing a residence in the new location, you will be reimbursed for reasonable and actual home purchase closing costs provided you sign a contract to purchase a home in the new area and close within one year of your effective date of transfer.


One time closing costs for permanent financing will be reimbursed including:


*

loan origination fee (up to 1% of loan amount),

*

normal attorney’s fees,

*

appraisal fees,

*

tax service fees,

*

title insurance (lender’s coverage, only),

*

recording fees (including tax stamps),

*

credit reports,

*

survey fees,

*

flood certification, and

*

inspections required by the lender.


In addition to all closing costs mentioned, the Company will pay one origination point to close a new first mortgage.  The Company does not cover one-time closing adjustments such as property taxes, home hazard insurance, fuel adjustments, or private mortgage insurance (PMI).  The Company does not cover the costs associated with establishing second mortgages or home equity lines of credit.


Tax Assistance

Gross-up will be provided for non-deductible home purchase closing costs.


National Mortgage Lender Program

The Company has selected national mortgage lenders to provide you with a wide variety of mortgage services.  Your Relocation Counselor will provide you with information on participating mortgage companies.


Using the services of these preferred lenders offers many advantages:


*

familiarity with the Company’s program,

*

mortgage loan pre-approval process,

*

direct billing of closing costs to the Company, and

*

consideration of current spousal income.


New Construction

If you elect to build a home in the new location, you may incur additional expenses as opposed to purchasing an existing home. Be aware in making your decision that policy benefits will not be extended if you decide to build.


25





MOVING TO THE NEW LOCATION


To enable you and your family to make an effective transition to the new area, the Company’s relocation program provides for a range of move-related assistance:


*

pre-move survey of your household goods by the moving company;

*

complete packing of all items;

*

transportation of your household goods to your new residence;

*

Up to $75,000 in carrier insurance for your household goods;

*

unloading, unpacking, and placement of all furniture in your new residence; and

*

storage of your household goods, if required.


Shipment of Household Goods

You will need to plan to be present during all phases of your move—pack, load, delivery, and unpacking.  Your own planning, preparation, and involvement during the process will contribute to a successful move.


Items Excluded From Shipment

The items listed below are not ordinarily considered household goods and are your responsibility.  The Company, Prudential Relocation, and the moving company will not take responsibility for these items.  


The Miscellaneous Expense Allowance is intended to assist you with expenses unique to your personal move and for items not covered by this policy.  Please note the Company will not pay for the shipping of the following items.  If you have any questions, contact your Relocation Counselor.


*

boats

*

campers, trailers, motor homes

*

farm machinery

*

firewood, rocks, sand, soil, etc.

*

perishable food items, refrigerated or frozen

*

aerosol cans, flammable liquids and other hazardous materials

*

lumber, bricks, blocks, cement, tiles and building materials

*

airplanes

*

plants, animals

*

large playground equipment

*

tool or storage sheds, outdoor buildings

*

valuables such as jewelry, money, coins, coin and stamp collections, irreplaceable photos, stocks, bonds, deeds, wills, and other legal documents




26







Playground and Similar Equipment

Playground, gym equipment, swimming pools, and similar items must be disassembled prior to your move day.  If the movers disassemble and reassemble these items, you will be responsible for payment of these costs at the time of service.


Insurance

Your household goods are protected with up to $75,000 of carrier insurance coverage.  


Items of Extraordinary Value (Including Antiques)

It is recommended that items of extraordinary value such as antiques, fine art, furs, silver, china, crystal, photography equipment, oriental rugs, baseball cards, comics, other collectibles, etc. be professionally appraised prior to your move.  If purchased within the last year, the value can be substantiated with a sales receipt.  The Company will not pay for appraisals or any special handling and packaging of antiques or other high-value items.


Packing and Loading

Careful packing and proper loading are very important steps in assuring a successful move.  It is important that the mover packs all your household goods.  The driver will prepare a complete inventory list of your household goods describing the condition of each item (nicks, scratches, dents, etc.).  Review the inventory carefully to make sure you agree with the driver’s description before you sign the inventory.  The inventory is an important document in the settlement of claims for loss and damage.


Unloading

Check with the van driver about delivery times at the new location. Be sure to give them all possible telephone numbers where you can be reached en route and in the new location.


As your goods are being unloaded, you must check off each item on your inventory sheets.  Make notations on the sheets of missing or damaged items immediately and have the driver sign it.  Assembly of furniture will be completed prior to the driver leaving your home.  Unpacking of your goods consists of removing the items from the cartons in the room for which they are labeled.  This does not include putting items away.  Disposal of cartons is included in the move services.



27








Billing

The van line will send the invoice for your move directly to Prudential Relocation.  If you transport household goods not covered by the policy or incur unauthorized charges, you will be expected to pay for these items at the time of delivery.


Tipping

Tips to the movers are not covered under this policy.  You may use your Miscellaneous Expense Allowance.


Shipment of Automobiles

The Company will reimburse mileage at the current business rate for up to two (2) automobiles to be driven to the new location.  In lieu of driving one automobiles, the Company will pay to ship your second automobile if the distance to the new location exceeds 300 miles.  


Storage in the New Location

You should make every effort to move directly to your permanent residence.  If necessary, however, you will be reimbursed for the storage of your household goods for up to 60 days.


Time Off for Moving

Dollar General understands that moving can be a time-consuming, and stressful project.  Therefore, you may need to take some time off from work for this purpose.  At your manager’s approval, Dollar General will allow you up to one week of paid time off for relocation.  During this time it is suggested that you take care of anything relating to your relocation so that you are able to become settled in your new residence and be fully focused on your job upon your return.  Please discuss your plans to take time off for moving with your manager well in advance , so that he or she may plan for your absence.


Travel to the New Location

You will be reimbursed for one-way transportation for you and your family to travel to the new location.  If you drive, you will be expected to drive a minimum of 300 miles per day and via the most direct route as established by a standard Rand McNally table or equivalent. Your Prudential Relocation Counselor will assist you with air travel reservations when applicable.


You will be reimbursed for the following reasonable and actual en route expenses:

*

lodging (one night in departure or destination location or en route night as needed),

*

meals,

*

mileage (current business mileage rate), parking, and tolls, and

*

airfare, if necessary (14-day advance purchase required).




28





TAX ASSISTANCE



Many reimbursements made to you are considered taxable income.  The Company is required to report all relocation reimbursements as compensation with the exception of items identified below.  For informational purposes, the Company will provide you with a tax assistance sheet that will be prepared and mailed to you in January following your move.


The following expenses are excluded from taxable income:


*

reasonable and normal expenses for the movement of household goods;

*

up to thirty days (30) of household goods storage while waiting to occupy your residence in the new location; and

*

reasonable and normal expenses for transportation and lodging for you and your eligible family members from your present location to the new location.


The Company will assist in paying the additional tax resulting from taxable relocation reimbursements.  Payments will be made directly to the federal, state, and FICA tax authorities.  It is recommended you seek guidance from a tax professional for any year in which you receive relocation-related services or expense reimbursements.  Accurate expense documentation is very important.


The tax assistance provided to you is based solely on your Company derived income, your filing status, and number of 1040 exemptions. Spouse income, investment income or any other outside income will not be included in the calculations.  Individual variances from the program’s calculations will not be reimbursed.


The additional taxes as calculated by the gross-up program and paid on your behalf will be included on your W-2 as income.  




29







Tax Treatment Table

Keep in mind some relocation items are not eligible for gross-up.  The table below outlines which relocation payments will be tax assisted.



Relocation Provision


Taxable

Deductible/ Excludable

Grossed Up

Miscellaneous Expense Allowance

ü

 

No

       

House Hunting

ü

 

Yes

       

Temporary Living

ü

 

Yes

       

Home Sale Assistance

Billed directly to Company

       

Independent Sale - eligible home

Independent Sale - ineligible home

ü

ü

 

No

Yes

       

Renters’ Assistance

ü

 

Yes

       

Home Purchase Closing Cost

ü

Point may be deductible

Yes

excluding point

       

Household Goods Move

 

ü

 
       

Storage

ü

Days over 30

ü

Yes

Days over 30

       

Travel to the New Location

Meals & Mileage greater than $.13/mile

Transportation & Lodging

Meals & Mileage greater than $.13/mile

       





30





Summary of Director Compensation

(as of January 28, 2005)


Directors of Dollar General Corporation receive a $6,250 quarterly retainer plus $1,250 for each Board or committee meeting attended and $625 for each telephonic Board or committee meeting attended. Committee chairpersons and the presiding director receive an additional quarterly retainer of $1,250. A director who also is a Dollar General employee does not receive any separate compensation for Board service.  Directors also receive reimbursement for fees and expenses incurred in connection with continuing education seminars and travel expenses related to meeting attendance or company-requested appearances.


In addition, a director who is not a Dollar General employee is entitled to receive an annual grant of 4,600 restricted stock units (6,000 restricted stock units in the case of a non-employee Chairman) pursuant to our 1998 Stock Incentive Plan. The restricted stock units generally vest on the first anniversary of the grant date, if the director is still serving as a director on that date, subject to accelerated vesting provisions as provided in the Plan; however, no common stock may be distributed, nor any amount paid, to any director in respect of restricted stock units until the director has ceased to be a member of the Board.  Dividend equivalents on the restricted stock units are credited to the director’s restricted stock unit account in accordance with the terms of the Plan.





Summary of Salaries of Named Executive Officers

(effective as of April 1, 2005)


On March 15, 2005, the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors of Dollar General Corporation approved the following salaries for Dollar General’s named executive officers (i.e., the top 5 most highly compensated officers), other than David Perdue, and on March 16, 2005, the independent directors of the Board of Directors of Dollar General approved Mr. Perdue’s salary as set forth below, all to be effective April 1, 2005:


David Perdue, Chairman and CEO

$1,000,000

David Tehle, Executive Vice President and CFO

$475,000

Kathleen Guion, Executive Vice President,

$425,000

Store Operations and Store Development

Stonie O’Briant, Executive Vice President,

$425,000

Merchandising, Marketing & Strategic Planning


Susan Lanigan, Executive Vice President and General Counsel

$375,000





EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

THIS EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT (“Agreement”), effective March 1, 2004 (“Effective Date”), is made and entered into by and between DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION (the “Company”), and Kathleen R. Guion (“Employee”).

W I T N E S S E T H:

WHEREAS, Company desires to employ Employee upon the terms and subject to the conditions hereinafter set forth, and Employee desires to accept such employment;

NOW, THEREFORE, for and in consideration of the premises, the mutual promises, covenants and agreements contained herein, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties agree as follows:

Employment Terms

1.

Employment .  Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, Company agrees to employ Employee as Executive Vice President, Store Operations of Dollar General Corporation.

2.

Term .  The term of this Agreement shall be until the second annual anniversary of the Effective Date (“Term”), unless otherwise terminated pursuant to Paragraphs 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12 hereof.

3.

Position, Duties and Administrative Support .

a.

Position .  Employee shall serve as Executive Vice President, Store Operations. Employee shall report to the President and Chief Operating Officer and perform such duties and responsibilities as the President and COO or the CEO may prescribe from time-to-time.

b.

Full-Time Efforts .  Employee shall perform and discharge faithfully, diligently and to the best of his /her ability such duties and responsibilities and shall devote his/her full-time efforts to the business and affairs of Company.  Employee agrees to promote the best interests of Company and to take no action that in any way damages the public image or reputation of Company, its subsidiaries or its affiliates.

c.

Administrative Support .  Employee shall be provided with office space and administrative support commensurate with his/her position.








d.

No Interference With Duties .  Employee shall not devote time to other activities which would inhibit or otherwise interfere with the proper performance of his/her duties, and shall not be directly or indirectly concerned or interested in any other occupation, activity or interest in any business whatsoever other than by reason of holding a non-controlling interest as a shareholder, securities holder or debenture holder in a corporation quoted on a nationally recognized exchange.  Employee may not serve as a member of a board of directors of a for-profit company, other than the Company or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates, during the Term without the express approval of the CEO.

4.

Work Standard .  Employee hereby agrees that he/she shall at all times comply with and abide by all terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, and all applicable work policies, procedures and rules as may be issued by Company.  Employee also agrees that he/she shall comply with all federal, state and local statutes, regulations and public ordinances governing the performance of his/her duties hereunder.

5.

Compensation .

a.

Base Salary .  Subject to the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, Company shall pay Employee, and Employee shall accept, an annual base salary (“Base Salary”) of no less than Three Hundred Fifty Thousand Dollars ($350,000).  The Base Salary shall be paid in accordance with Company’s normal payroll practices and may be increased from time to time at the sole discretion of the Company.

b.

Incentive Bonus .  Employee’s incentive compensation for the Term of this Agreement shall be determined under the Company’s bonus program for officers established by the Compensation Committee and amended in its discretion.  The actual bonus paid pursuant to this Paragraph 5(b) shall be based on performance criteria established by the Compensation Committee in accordance with the terms and conditions of the bonus program for officers.

c.

Stock Based Compensation .  Employee shall be eligible for award grants from time-to-time consistent with the award grants made to similarly situated officers of the Company as governed by the terms of the 1998 Employee Stock Incentive Plan, as may be amended, or any successor plan thereof (the “Stock Plan”), as determined in the sole discretion of the Compensation Committee.



2





d.

Vacation .  Employee shall be entitled to three weeks paid vacation time within the first year of employment. After five years of employment, Employee shall be entitled to four weeks paid vacation. Vacation time is granted on the anniversary of Employee’s hire date each year. Any available but unused vacation as of the annual anniversary of employment date or at Employee’s termination date shall be forfeited.

e.

Business Expenses .  Employee shall be reimbursed for all reasonable business expenses incurred in carrying out the work hereunder.  Employee shall adhere to the Company’s expense reimbursement policies and shall follow those expense reimbursement procedures that generally apply to other Company employees.

f.

Perquisites .  Employee shall be entitled to receive such other executive perquisites, fringe and other benefits as are provided to officers and their families under any of the Company’s plans and/or programs in effect from time to time and such other benefits as are customarily available to officers of the Company and their families.

6.

Benefits .  During the Term, Employee (and, where applicable, Employee’s eligible dependents) shall be eligible to participate in the various Company welfare benefit plans, practices and policies (including, without limitation, medical, prescription, dental, vision, disability, employee life, accidental death and travel accident insurance plans and programs) to the extent and in accordance with the terms of those plans as generally provided to officers or other similarly situated employees of the Company.  In addition, Employee shall be eligible to participate, pursuant to their terms, in any other benefit plans offered by the Company to officers or other employees (excluding plans applicable solely to certain officers of the Company in accordance with the express terms of such plans), including, without limitation, the 401(k) Retirement and Savings Plan and CDP/SERP Plan.  Collectively the plans and arrangements described in this Paragraph 6 and as they may be amended or modified in accordance with their terms are hereinafter referred to as the “Benefits Plans.”  Notwithstanding the above, Employee understands and acknowledges that Employee is not eligible for benefits under the Dollar General Corporation Severance Plan and that the only severance benefits Employee is entitled to are set forth in this Agreement.

7.

Termination for Cause .  Under the following conditions, each of which shall constitute “Cause” or “Termination for Cause”, this Agreement may be terminated immediately at any time by Company without any liability owing to Employee or Employee’s beneficiaries under



3





this Agreement, except for those benefits owed under any other plan or agreement covering Employee which shall be governed by the terms of such plan or agreement:

a.

Any act involving fraud, dishonesty or material misrepresentation, or any material breach of applicable regulations of competent authorities in relation to trading or dealing with stocks, securities, investments and the like;

b.

Other than as required by law, the carrying out of any activity or the making of any public statement which prejudices or reduces the good name and standing of Company or any of its affiliates or would bring any one of these into public contempt or ridicule;

c.

Attendance at work in a state of intoxication or being found in possession of any prohibited drug or substance, possession of which would amount to a criminal offense;

d.

Assault or other act of violence against any employee of Company or other person; or

e.

Conviction of any felony whatsoever or any misdemeanor involving moral turpitude.

A termination for Cause shall be effective only if the Company has given Employee written notice of its intention to terminate for Cause, describing Employee’s acts or omissions that are believed to constitute Cause, and has given Employee fair opportunity to respond.

8.

Termination upon Death .  Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, this Agreement shall terminate immediately upon Employee’s death, and Company shall have no further liability to Employee or his/her beneficiaries under this Agreement, except for benefits under the Benefits Plans and Stock Plan covering Employee to the extent provided by the terms of such Benefits Plans and Stock Plan.

9.

Disability .  If a Disability (as defined below) of Employee occurs during the Term, the Company may notify Employee of the Company’s intention to terminate Employee’s employment.  In that event, employment shall terminate effective on the termination date provided in such notice of termination (the “Disability Effective Date”), and this Agreement shall terminate without further liability to Employee, except for benefits under the Benefits Plans and Stock Plan covering Employee to the extent provided by the terms of such Benefits Plans and Stock Plan.  In this Agreement, “Disability” means:



4





(a)

a long-term disability, as defined in the Company’s applicable long-term disability plan as then in effect; or

(b)

Employee’s inability reasonably to perform his/her duties under this Agreement because of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that (i) can reasonably be expected to result in death or (ii) has lasted or can reasonably be expected to last longer than ninety (90) consecutive days.  In this circumstance, the existence of a Disability shall be determined by the Company, in its sole and absolute discretion, upon receipt of competent medical advice from a qualified physician selected by or acceptable to the Company.  In this circumstance, Employee shall, if there is any question about his/her Disability, submit to a physical examination by a qualified physician selected by the Company. Nothing in this subsection (b) is intended to nor shall it be deemed to broaden or modify the definition of “disability” in the Company’s long-term disability plan.  

10.

Employee’s Termination of Employment .

a.

Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, Employee may terminate his/her employment and this Agreement at any time, for no reason, with thirty (30) days written notice to Company.  Upon such termination, Employee shall be entitled to his/her prorata Base Salary through the date of termination and such other vested benefits under any other plan or agreement covering Employee which shall be governed by the terms of such plan or agreement. Employee shall not be entitled to those payments and benefits listed in paragraph 11, unless he/she terminates his/her employment for Good Reason, as defined below.

b.

Good Reason shall mean any of the following actions taken by the Company:

(i)

a reduction by the Company in the Employee’s Base Salary or target bonus level;

(ii)

the Company shall fail to continue in effect any significant Company-sponsored compensation plan or benefit (without replacing it with a similar plan or with a compensation equivalent), unless such action is in connection with across-the-board plan changes or terminations similarly affecting at least ninety-five percent (95%) of all executive employees of the Company;



5





(iii)

Company’s principal executive offices shall be moved to a location outside the middle-Tennessee area, or Employee is required to be based anywhere other than the Company’s principal executive offices;

(iv)

Without his/her written consent, the assignment to the Employee by the Company of duties inconsistent with, or the significant reduction of the title, powers and functions associated with, Employee’s position, titles or offices, unless such action is the result of a restructuring or realignment of duties and responsibilities by the Company, for business reasons, that leaves Employee at the same officer level (i.e., Vice President, Executive Vice President, etc.) and with a similar level of responsibility, or is the result of Employee’s failure to meet pre-established and objective performance criteria, or is the result of his/her termination  for Disability or Cause;

(v)

Any material breach by the Company of any provision of this Agreement; or

(vi)

The failure of any successor (whether direct or indirect, by purchase, merger, consolidation or otherwise) to all or substantially all of the business and/or assets of the Company to assume expressly and agree to perform this Agreement in the same manner and to the same extent that the Company would be required to perform it if no such succession had taken place.

Good Reason shall not include Employee’s death or Disability.  The Company shall have the opportunity to cure any claimed event of Good Reason (other than subparagraph (vi) above) within thirty (30) days notice from Employee.

11.

Termination without Cause or by Employee for Good Reason .  If Employee’s employment is terminated by the Company without Cause which the Company may do at any time prior to the expiration of the Term (it being understood by the Parties that termination by death or Disability shall not constitute termination without Cause), Employee terminates for Good Reason (as defined above), or the Company fails to renew or extend the Term of this Employment Agreement unless such failure to renew or extend is accompanied with a mutually agreeable severance arrangement between the Company and the Employee or is the result of Employee’s voluntary retirement, then Employee shall be entitled (in lieu of the payments referenced in Paragraph 12 below, and not in addition to), only upon the execution and effectiveness of the Release attached



6





hereto and made a part hereof, to continuation of Employee’s Base Salary as of the date immedi­ately preceding the termination for 24 months, payable in accordance with the Company’s normal payroll cycle and procedures. In addition, Employee shall be entitled to outplacement services, provided by the Company, for one year or until other employment is secured, whichever comes first.

In the event that there is a breach by Employee of any continuing obligations under this Agreement after termination of employment, any unpaid amounts under this Paragraph 11 shall be forfeited.  Any payments or reimbursements under this Paragraph 11 shall not be deemed the continuation of Employee’s employment for any purpose.  The Company’s obligations under this Paragraph 11 will not negate or reduce (i) any amounts otherwise due but not yet paid to Employee by the Company, or (ii) any other amounts payable to Employee outside this Agreement, or any other rights that Employee may have, under the terms of any of the applicable Benefit Plans and Stock Plan as in effect on the employment termination date.  Further, the Company may, at any time and in its sole discretion, make a lump-sum payment of all amounts, or all remaining amounts, due to Employee under this Paragraph 11.

12.

Effect of Change in Control .

a.

If within two (2) years following a Change in Control (as hereafter defined), the Company (or any successor to the Company) terminates Employee’s employment without Cause or Employee terminates his/her employment for Good Reason, then upon the execution and the effectiveness of the Release attached hereto and made a part hereof, the Company shall pay to Employee (in lieu of the payments referenced in paragraph 11 above, and not in addition to):

(i)

a lump sum payment equal to two times Employee’s Base Salary in effect immediately prior to the Change in Control plus two times the amount of Employee’s target incentive bonus payment in effect immediately prior to the Change in Control;

(ii)

a lump sum payment in an amount equal to two (2) times the annual Employee contribution to participate in the Company’s medical, dental and vision benefits program;

(iii)

outplacement services, provided by the Company, for one year or until other employment is secured, whichever comes first; and



7





(iv)

Employee’s awards, if any, granted pursuant to the Stock Plan or any precursor or successor plan shall fully vest and shall remain exercisable in accordance with the terms of the Stock Plan.

b.

For purposes of Paragraph 12(a), the payments described therein shall be limited to the Capped Amount.  The “Capped Amount” shall be the amount otherwise payable under Paragraph 12(a), reduced in such amount and to such extent that no amount of the payment under Paragraph 12(a), plus all other “parachute payments” under Code Section 280G (collectively “Total Payments”), would constitute an “excess parachute payment” under Code Section 280G.  Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, the Employee’s Total Payments shall not be limited to the Capped Amount if it is determined that Employee would receive at least $25,000 in greater after-tax proceeds if no such reduction is made.  The calculation of the Capped Amount and all other determinations relating to the applicability of Code Section 280G (and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder) to the payments contemplated by this Employment Agreement shall be made by the tax department of the independent public accounting firm then responsible for preparing or auditing the Company’s consolidated federal income tax return, and such determinations shall be binding upon the Employee and the Company.

c.

Change in Control shall mean the date as of which any of the following occurs:

(i)

The Consummation of an acquisition after which any individual, entity or group within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (hereinafter “Exchange Act”) shall have beneficial ownership within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act (hereinafter “Beneficial Ownership”) of 35% or more of the Voting Securities of the Company; provided, however, that for purposes of the preceding sentence, the following acquisitions of Voting Securities of the Company shall not constitute a Change in Control:

(A)

ownership or an acquisition by Cal Turner, James Stephen Turner or a member or members of his/her or their immediate family or any trust, partnership, foundation or similar entity for the exclusive benefit of any such persons (collectively, the “Turner Family Interests”);



8





(B)

any acquisition directly from the Company;

(C)

any acquisition by the Company or an affiliate which the Company Controls;

(D)

any acquisition by any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Company or a subsidiary of the Company;

(E)

any acquisition by a qualified pension plan or publicly held mutual fund;

(F)

any acquisition by the Employee or a group within the meaning of Section 14(d) of the Exchange Act that includes the Employee; or

(G)

any Business Combination which would not otherwise constitute a Change in Control because of the application of clauses (A), (B) and (C) of Paragraph 12(c)(iii).

(ii)

A change in the composition of the Board of Directors of the Company whereby individuals who constitute the Board of Directors of the Company as of the Effective Date of this Agreement (plus any individual who shall become a director subsequent to such date whose election or nomination for election by the shareholders was approved by a vote of at least 75% of the directors then comprising the Board of Directors) (hereinafter “Incumbent Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Board of Directors.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, no individual who shall become a director of the Board of Directors subsequent to the Effective Date whose initial assumption of office occurs as a result of an actual or threatened election contest (within the meaning of Rule 14a-11 of the Regulations promulgated under the Exchange Act) with respect to the election or removal of directors or other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of an individual, entity or group within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Exchange Act other than the Board of Directors shall be a member of the Incumbent Board.

(iii)

Consummation of a Business Combination, unless, immediately following such Business Combination, all of the following three conditions are met:



9





(A)

all or substantially all of the individuals and entities who held Beneficial Ownership, respectively, of the Voting Securities of the Company immediately prior to such Business Combination beneficially own, directly or indirectly, 65% or more of the combined voting power of the Voting Securities of the corporation surviving or resulting from such Business Combination, (including, without limitation, a corporation which as a result of such transaction holds Beneficial Ownership of all or substantially all of the Voting Securities of the Company or all or substantially all of the Company’s assets) (such surviving or resulting corporation to be referred to as “Surviving Company”), in substantially the same proportions as their ownership, immediately prior to such Business Combination, of the Voting Securities of the Company;

(B)

no individual, entity or group within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Exchange Act (excluding any corporation resulting from such Business Combination, the Turner Family Interests, any qualified pension plan, a publicly held mutual fund, the Employee, a group within the meaning of Section 14(d) of the Exchange Act that includes the Employee, or an employee benefit plan (or related trust) of the Company or Surviving Company) holds Beneficial Ownership, directly or indirectly, of 35% or more of the combined voting power of the then outstanding Voting Securities of Surviving Company except to the extent that such ownership existed immediately prior to the Business Combination; and

(C)

at least a majority of the members of the board of directors of the Surviving Company were members of the Incumbent Board at the earlier of the date of execution of the initial agreement, or of the action of the Board of Directors of the Company, providing for such Business Combination.

(iv)

For purposes of subparagraphs (i) - (iii) above, the terms below shall have the following meanings:

(A)

Business Combination ” shall mean a reorganization, merger or consolidation of the Company or sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company.



10





(B)

Consummation ” shall mean the completion of the final act necessary to complete a transaction as a matter of law, including, but not limited to, any required approvals by the corporation’s shareholders and board of directors, the transfer of legal and beneficial title to securities or assets and the final approval of the transaction by any applicable domestic or foreign governments or governmental agencies.

(C)

Control ” shall mean, in the case of a corporation, Beneficial Ownership of more than 50% of the combined voting power of the corporation’s Voting Securities, or in the case of any other entity, Beneficial Ownership of more than 50% of such entity’s voting equity interests.

(D)

Voting Securities ” shall mean the outstanding voting securities of a company entitling the holder thereof to vote generally in the election of such company’s directors.

13.

Publicity; No Disparaging Statement .  Except as otherwise provided in Paragraph 14 hereof, Employee and the Company covenant and agree that they shall not engage in any communi­cations which shall disparage one another or interfere with their existing or prospective business relationships.

14.

Confidentiality and Legal Process .  Employee represents and agrees that he/she will keep the terms, amount and fact of this Agreement confidential and that he/she will not hereafter disclose any information concerning this Agreement to any one other than his/her personal agents.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in this Agreement is intended to prohibit Employee from performing any duty or obligation that shall arise as a matter of law.  Specifically, Employee shall continue to be under a duty to truthfully respond to any legal and valid subpoena or other legal process.  This Agreement is not intended in any way to proscribe Employee’s right and ability to provide information to any federal, state or local government in the lawful exercise of such government’s governmental functions.



11






15.

Business Protection Provision Definitions .

a.

Preamble .  As a material inducement to the Company to enter into this Agreement, and its recognition of the valuable experience, knowledge and proprietary information Employee will gain from his/her employment with the Company, Employee warrants and agrees he/she will abide by and adhere to the business protection provisions in Paragraphs 15, 16, 17, 18 and 19 herein.

b.

Definitions .  For purposes of Paragraphs 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20 herein, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

(i)

“Competitive Position” shall mean any employment, consulting, advisory, directorship, agency, promotional or independent contractor arrangement between the Employee and (x) any person or Entity engaged wholly or in material part in the business in which the Company is engaged, including but not limited to such other similar businesses as Wal-Mart, Family Dollar Stores, Fred’s, the 99 Cents Stores and Dollar Tree Stores, or (y) any person or Entity then attempting or planning to enter the business in which the Company is engaged (i.e., the deep discount consumable basics retail business) whereby the Employee is required to or does perform services on behalf of or for the benefit of such person or Entity which are substantially similar to the services Employee participated in or directed at any time while employed by the Company or any of its affiliates.

(ii)

“Confidential Information” shall mean the proprietary or confidential data, information, documents or materials (whether oral, written, electronic or otherwise) belonging to or pertaining to the Company, other than “Trade Secrets” (as defined below), which is of tangible or intangible value to the Company and the details of which are not generally known to the competitors of the Company.  Confidential Information shall also include any items marked “CONFIDENTIAL” or some similar designation or which are otherwise identified as being confidential.

(iii)

“Entity” or “Entities” shall mean any business, individual, partnership, joint venture, agency, governmental agency, body or subdivision, association, firm, corporation, limited liability company or other entity of any kind.



12





(iv)

“Restricted Period” shall mean two (2) years following the Employee’s termination date.

(v)

“Territory” shall include those states in which the Company maintains stores at Employee’s termination date.

(vi)

“Trade Secrets” shall mean information or data of or about the Company, including, but not limited to, technical or non-technical data, formulas, patterns, compilations, programs, devices, methods, techniques, drawings, processes, financial data, financial plans, product plans or lists of actual or potential customers or suppliers that:  (A) derives economic value, actual or potential, from not being generally known to, and not being readily ascertainable by proper means by, other persons who can obtain economic value from its disclosure or use; (B) is the subject of efforts that are reasonable under the circumstances to maintain its secrecy; and (C) any other information which is defined as a “trade secret” under applicable law.

(vii)

“Work Product” shall mean all tangible work product, property, data, documentation, “know-how,” concepts or plans, inventions, improvements, techniques and processes relating to the Company that were conceived, discovered, created, written, revised or developed by Employee during the term of his/her employment with the Company.

16.

Nondisclosure:  Ownership of Proprietary Property .

a.

In recognition of the need of the Company to protect its legitimate business interests during the Term of this Agreement and thereafter, Confidential Information and Trade Secrets, Employee hereby covenants and agrees that Employee shall regard and treat Trade Secrets and all Confidential Information as strictly confidential and wholly-owned by the Company and shall not, for any reason, in any fashion, either directly or indirectly, use, sell, lend, lease, distribute, license, give, transfer, assign, show, disclose, disseminate, reproduce, copy, misappropriate or otherwise communicate any such item or information to any third party or Entity for any purpose other than in accordance with this Agreement or as required by applicable law:  (i) with regard to each item constituting a Trade Secret, at all times such information remains a “trade secret” under applicable law, and (ii) with regard to any Confidential Information, for the Restricted Period.



13





b.

Employee shall exercise best efforts to ensure the continued confidentiality of all Trade Secrets and Confidential Information, and he/she shall immediately notify the Company of any unauthorized disclosure or use of any Trade Secrets or Confidential Information of which Employee becomes aware.  Employee shall assist the Company, to the extent necessary, in the protection of or procurement of any intellectual property protection or other rights in any of the Trade Secrets or Confidential Information.

c.

All Work Product shall be owned exclusively by the Company.  To the greatest extent possible, any Work Product shall be deemed to be “work made for hire” (as defined in the Copyright Act, 17 U.S.C.A. § 101 et seq., as amended), and Employee hereby unconditionally and irrevocably transfers and assigns to the Company all right, title and interest Employee currently has or may have by operation of law or otherwise in or to any Work Product, including, without limitation, all patents, copyrights, trademarks (and the goodwill associated therewith), trade secrets, service marks (and the goodwill associated therewith) and other intellectual property rights.  Employee agrees to execute and deliver to the Company any transfers, assignments, documents or other instruments which the Company may deem necessary or appropriate, from time to time, to protect the rights granted herein or to vest complete title and ownership of any and all Work Product, and all associated intellectual property and other rights therein, exclusively in the Company.

17.

Non-Interference with Employees .  Employee covenants and agrees that during the Restricted Period he/she will not, either directly or indirectly, alone or in conjunction with any other person or Entity:  (a) actively recruit, solicit, attempt to solicit, or induce any person who is an exempt employee of the Company or any of its subsidiaries, or is an officer or exempt employee of any of the other DG Entities to leave or cease such employment for any reason whatsoever; or (b) hire or engage the services of any such person described in Paragraph 17(a) above in any business substantially similar or competitive with that in which the Company was engaged during his/her employment.

18.

Non-Interference with Business Relationships .

a.

Employee acknowledges that in the course of employment, he/she will learn about Company’s business, services, materials, programs and products and the manner in which they are developed, marketed, serviced and provided.  Employee knows and acknowledges that the Company has invested considerable time and money in developing its



14





programs, agreements, stores, vendors, representatives, services, products and marketing techniques and that they are unique and original.  Employee further acknowledges that the Company must keep secret all pertinent information divulged to Employee and Company’s business concepts, ideas, programs, plans and processes, so as not to aid Company’s competitors.  Accordingly, Company is entitled to the following protection, which Employee agrees is reasonable:

b.

Employee covenants and agrees that during the Restricted Period, he/she will not, on his/her own behalf or on behalf of any person or Entity, solicit, direct, appropriate, call upon, or initiate communication or contact with any person or entity or any representative of any person or entity, with whom Employee had contact during his/her employment, in such a way as to interfere with Company’s business relationships.

19.

Agreement Not to Work in Competitive Position .

a.

Employee covenants and agrees not to obtain or work in a Competitive Position within the Territory for the Restricted Period.

b.

Employee and Company expressly covenant and agree that the scope, territorial, time and other restrictions contained in this entire Agreement constitute the most reasonable and equitable restrictions possible to protect the business interest of the Company given: (i) the business of the Company; (ii) the competitive nature of the Company’s industry; and (iii) that Employee’s skills are such that he/she could easily find alternative, commensurate employment or consulting work in his/her field which would not violate any of the provisions of this Agreement.  The Employee further acknowledges that the compensation and benefits described in Paragraphs 5, 11 and 12 are also in consideration of his/her covenants and agreements contained in Paragraphs 15 through 19 hereof.

20.

Return of Materials . Upon the Employee’s termination, or at any point after that time, upon the specific request of the Company, Employee shall return to the Company all written or descriptive materials of any kind belonging or relating to the Company or its affiliates, including, without limitation, any originals, copies and abstracts containing any Work Product, intellectual property, Confidential Information and Trade Secrets in Employee’s possession or control.



15






21.

General Provisions .

a.

Amendment .  This Agreement may be amended or modified only by a writing signed by both of the parties hereto.

b.

Binding Agreement .  This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon Employee, his/her heirs and personal representatives, and the Company and its successors and assigns.

c.

Waiver Of Breach; Specific Performance .  The waiver of a breach of any provision of this Agreement shall not operate or be construed as a waiver of any other breach.  Each of the parties to this Agreement will be entitled to enforce its or his/her rights under this Agreement, specifically, to recover damages by reason of any breach of any provision of this Agreement and to exercise all other rights existing in its or his/her favor.  The parties hereto agree and acknowledge that money damages may not be an adequate remedy for any breach of the provisions of this Agreement and that any party may in its or his/her sole discretion apply to any court of law or equity of competent jurisdiction for specific performance or injunctive relief in order to enforce or prevent any violations of the provisions of this Agreement.

d.

Unsecured General Creditor .  The Company shall neither reserve nor speci­fically set aside funds for the payment of its obligations under this Agreement, and such obligations shall be paid solely from the general assets of the Company.

e.

No Effect On Other Arrangements .  It is expressly understood and agreed that the payments made in accordance with this Agreement are in addition to any other benefits or compensation to which Employee may be entitled or for which he/she may be eligible, whether funded or unfunded, by reason of his/her employment with the Company.

f.

Tax Withholding .  There shall be deducted from each payment under this Agreement the amount of any tax required by any govern­mental authority to be withheld and paid over by the Company to such governmental authority for the account of Employee.

g.

Notices .

(i)

All notices and all other communications provided for herein shall be in writing and delivered personally to the other designated party, or mailed by



16





certified or registered mail, return receipt requested, or delivered by a recognized national overnight courier service, or sent by facsimile, as follows:

If to Company to:

Dollar General Corporation

Attn: General Counsel

1 Mission Ridge

Goodlettsville, TN  37072-2171

Facsimile: (615)855-5180

If to Employee to:

Kathleen Guion

8805 Smoketree Cove

Austin, TX 78738



(ii)

All notices sent under this Agreement shall be deemed given twenty-four (24) hours after sent by facsimile or courier, seventy-two (72) hours after sent by certified or registered mail and when delivered if personal delivery.

(iii)

Either party hereto may change the address to which notice is to be sent hereunder by written notice to the other party in accordance with the provisions of this Paragraph.

h.

Governing Law .  This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Tennessee (without giving effect to conflict of laws).

i.

Entire Agreement .  This Agreement contains the full and complete understanding of the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter contained herein and this Agreement supersedes and replaces any prior agreement, either oral or written, which Employee may have with Company that relates generally to the same subject matter.

j.

Assignment .  This Agreement may not be assigned by Employee, and any attempted assignment shall be null and void and of no force or effect.

k.

Severability .  If any one or more of the terms, provisions, covenants or restrictions of this Agreement shall be determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid, void or unenforceable, then the remainder of the terms, provisions, covenants and restrictions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect, and to that end the provisions hereof shall be deemed severable.



17





l.

Paragraph Headings .  The paragraph headings set forth herein are for convenience of reference only and shall not affect the meaning or interpretation of this Agreement whatsoever.

m.

Interpretation .  Should a provision of this Agreement require judicial interpretation, it is agreed that the judicial body interpreting or construing the Agreement shall not apply the assumption that the terms hereof shall be more strictly construed against one party by reason of the rule of construction that an instrument is to be construed more strictly against the party which itself or through its agents prepared the agreement, it being agreed that all parties and/or their agents have participated in the preparation hereof.

n.

Voluntary Agreement .  Employee and Company represent and agree that each has reviewed all aspects of this Agreement, has carefully read and fully understands all provisions of this Agreement, and is voluntarily entering into this Agreement.  Each party represents and agrees that such party has had the opportunity to review any and all aspects of this Agreement with legal, tax or other adviser(s) of such party’s choice before executing this Agreement.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed, or caused their duly authorized representative to execute, this Agreement effective the 25 day of March, 2004.


 

“COMPANY”

     
 

DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION

     
 

By:

/s/ David A. Perdue

     
 

Its:

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer

     
     
 

“EMPLOYEE”

     
 

/s/ Kathleen R. Guion

 

Kathleen Guion

     
 

Witnessed By:

   
 

/s/ Anessa Anderton



18





Addendum to Employment

Agreement with ___________________

RELEASE AGREEMENT

THIS RELEASE (“Release”) is made and entered into by and between _________________ (“Employee”) and DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION , and its successor or assigns (“Company”).

WHEREAS, Employee and Company have agreed that Employee’s employment with Dollar General Corporation shall terminate on ___________________;

WHEREAS, Employee and the Company have previously entered into that certain Employment Agreement, effective _____________________ (“Agreement”), that this Release is incorporated therein by reference;

WHEREAS, Employee and Company desire to delineate their respective rights, duties and obligations attendant to such termination and desire to reach an accord and satisfaction of all claims arising from Employee’s employment, and his termination of employment, with appropriate releases, in accordance with the Agreement;

WHEREAS, the Company desires to compensate Employee in accordance with the Agreement for service he/she has provided or will provide for the Company;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and the agreements of the parties set forth in this Release, and other good and valuable consideration the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto, intending to be legally bound, hereby covenant and agree as follows:

1.

Claims Released Under This Agreement .

In exchange for receiving the benefits described in Paragraph 11 or 12 of the Agreement, I hereby voluntarily and irrevocably waive, release, dismiss with prejudice, and withdraw all claims, complaints, suits or demands of any kind whatsoever (whether known or unknown) which I ever had, may have, or now have against Company and other current or former subsidiaries or affiliates of the Company and their past, present and future officers, directors, employees, agents, insurers and attorneys (collectively, the “Releasees”), arising from or relating to (directly or indirectly) my



19





employment or the termination of my employment or other events occurred as of the date of execution of this Agreement, including but not limited to:

a.

claims for violations of Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, the Age Discrimination in Employment Act, the Fair Labor Standards Act, the Civil Rights Act of 1991, the Americans With Disabilities Act, the Equal Pay Act, the Family and Medical Leave Act, 42 U.S.C. § 1981, the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002, the National Labor Relations Act, the Labor Management Relations Act, Executive Order 11246, Executive Order 11141, the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, or the Employee Retirement Income Security Act;

b.

claims for violations of any other federal or state statute or regulation or local ordinance;

c.

claims for lost or unpaid wages, compensation, or benefits, defamation, intentional or negligent infliction of emotional distress, assault, battery, wrongful or constructive discharge, negligent hiring, retention or supervision, fraud, misrepresentation, conversion, tortious interference, breach of contract, or breach of fiduciary duty;

d.

claims to benefits under any bonus, severance, workforce reduction, early retirement, outplacement, or any other similar type plan sponsored by the Company (except for benefits specifically provided for under the Benefits Plans as specified in Section 2, below); or

e.

any other claims under state law arising in tort or contract.

2.

Claims Not Released Under This Agreement .

In signing this Agreement, I am not releasing any claims that may arise under the terms of this Agreement or which may arise out of events occurring after the date I execute this Agreement.

I am also not releasing claims to benefits that I am already entitled to receive under the Benefits Plans.  However, I understand and acknowledge that nothing herein is intended to or shall be construed to require the Company to institute or continue in effect any particular plan or benefit sponsored by the Company and the Company hereby reserves the right to amend or terminate any of its benefit programs at any time in accordance with the procedures set forth in such plans.

Nothing in this Agreement shall prohibit me from engaging in protected activities under applicable law or from communicating, either voluntarily or otherwise, with any governmental agency concerning any potential violation of the law.



20





3.

No Assignment of Claim .  Employee represents that he/she has not assigned or transferred, or purported to assign or transfer, any claims or any portion thereof or interest therein to any party prior to the date of this Release.

4.

Compensation .  In accordance with the Agreement, the Company agrees to pay the Employee, or if he/she becomes eligible for payments under Paragraph 11 or 12 but dies before receipt thereof, his/her spouse or his/her estate, as the case may be, the amount provided in Paragraph 11 or 12 of the Agreement.

5.

Publicity; No Disparaging Statement .  Except as otherwise provided in Paragraph 14 of the Agreement, Employee and the Company covenant and agree that they shall not engage in any communi­cations which shall disparage one another or interfere with their existing or prospective business relationships.

6.

No Admission Of Liability .  This Release shall not in any way be construed as an admission by the Company or Employee of any improper actions or liability whatsoever as to one another, and each specifically disclaims any liability to or improper actions against the other or any other person, on the part of itself or himself/herself, its or his/her employees or agents.

7.

Voluntary Execution .  Employee warrants, represents and agrees that he/she has been encouraged in writing to seek advice from anyone of his/her choosing regarding this Release, including his/her attorney and accountant or tax advisor prior to his/her signing it; that this Release represents written notice to do so; that he/she has been given the opportunity and sufficient time to seek such advice; and that he/she fully understands the meaning and contents of this Release. He/she further represents and warrants that he/she was not coerced, threatened or otherwise forced to sign this Release, and that his/her signature appearing hereinafter is voluntary and genuine.  EMPLOYEE UNDERSTANDS THAT HE/SHE MAY TAKE UP TO TWENTY-ONE (21) DAYS TO CONSIDER WHETHER OR NOT HE/SHE DESIRES TO ENTER INTO THIS RELEASE.

8.

Ability to Revoke Agreement .  EMPLOYEE UNDERSTANDS THAT HE/SHE MAY REVOKE THIS RELEASE BY NOTIFYING THE COMPANY IN WRITING OF SUCH REVOCATION WITHIN SEVEN (7) DAYS OF HIS/HER EXECUTION OF THIS RELEASE AND THAT THIS RELEASE IS NOT EFFECTIVE UNTIL THE EXPIRATION OF SUCH SEVEN (7) DAY PERIOD.  HE/SHE UNDERSTANDS THAT UPON THE EXPIRATION OF SUCH SEVEN (7) DAY PERIOD THIS RELEASE WILL BE BINDING



21





UPON HIM/HER AND HIS/HER HEIRS, ADMINISTRATORS, REPRESENTATIVES, EXECUTORS, SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS AND WILL BE IRREVOCABLE.

Acknowledged and Agreed To:

“COMPANY”

DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION

By:


Its:


I UNDERSTAND THAT BY SIGNING THIS RELEASE, I AM GIVING UP RIGHTS I MAY HAVE.  I UNDERSTAND THAT I DO NOT HAVE TO SIGN THIS RELEASE.

“EMPLOYEE”


Date


WITNESSED BY:


Date




22




EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT

THIS EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENT (“Agreement”), effective March 15, 2005 (“Effective Date”), is made and entered into by and between DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION (the “Company”), and Susan Lanigan (“Employee”).

W I T N E S S E T H:

WHEREAS, Company desires to employ Employee upon the terms and subject to the conditions hereinafter set forth, and Employee desires to accept such employment;

NOW, THEREFORE, for and in consideration of the premises, the mutual promises, covenants and agreements contained herein, and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties agree as follows:

Employment Terms

1.

Employment .  Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, Company agrees to employ Employee as EVP, General Counsel of Dollar General Corporation.

2.

Term .  The term of this Agreement shall be until the second annual anniversary of the Effective Date (“Term”), unless otherwise terminated pursuant to Paragraphs 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12 hereof.

3.

Position, Duties and Administrative Support .

a.

Position .  Employee shall serve as EVP, General Counsel . Employee shall report to the Chairman & CEO and perform such duties and responsibilities as the Chairman & CEO may prescribe from time-to-time.

b.

Full-Time Efforts .  Employee shall perform and discharge faithfully, diligently and to the best of his /her ability such duties and responsibilities and shall devote his/her full-time efforts to the business and affairs of Company.  Employee agrees to promote the best interests of Company and to take no action that in any way damages the public image or reputation of Company, its subsidiaries or its affiliates.

c.

Administrative Support .  Employee shall be provided with office space and administrative support commensurate with his/her position.

d.

No Interference With Duties .  Employee shall not devote time to other activities which would inhibit or otherwise interfere with the proper performance of his/her






duties, and shall not be directly or indirectly concerned or interested in any other occupation, activity or interest in any business whatsoever other than by reason of holding a non-controlling interest as a shareholder, securities holder or debenture holder in a corporation quoted on a nationally recognized exchange.  Employee may not serve as a member of a board of directors of a for-profit company, other than the Company or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates, during the Term without the express approval of the CEO.

4.

Work Standard .  Employee hereby agrees that he/she shall at all times comply with and abide by all terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, and all applicable work policies, procedures and rules as may be issued by Company.  Employee also agrees that he/she shall comply with all federal, state and local statutes, regulations and public ordinances governing the performance of his/her duties hereunder.

5.

Compensation .

a.

Base Salary .  Subject to the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement, Company shall pay Employee, and Employee shall accept, an annual base salary (“Base Salary”) of no less than three hundred and fifty thousand Dollars ($350,000).  The Base Salary shall be paid in accordance with Company’s normal payroll practices and may be increased from time to time at the sole discretion of the Company.

b.

Incentive Bonus .  Employee’s incentive compensation for the Term of this Agreement shall be determined under the Company’s bonus program for officers established by the Compensation Committee and amended in its discretion.  The actual bonus paid pursuant to this Paragraph 5(b) shall be based on performance criteria established by the Compensation Committee in accordance with the terms and conditions of the bonus program for officers.

c.

Stock Based Compensation .  Employee shall be eligible for award grants from time-to-time consistent with the award grants made to similarly situated officers of the Company as governed by the terms of the 1998 Employee Stock Incentive Plan, as may be amended, or any successor plan thereof (the “Stock Plan”), as determined in the sole discretion of  the Compensation Committee.

d.

Vacation .  Employee shall be entitled to three weeks paid vacation time within the first year of employment. After five years of employment, Employee shall be entitled to four weeks paid vacation. Vacation time is granted on the anniversary of



2





Employee’s hire date each year. Any available but unused vacation as of the annual anniversary of employment date or at Employee’s termination date shall be forfeited.

e.

Business Expenses .  Employee shall be reimbursed for all reasonable business expenses incurred in carrying out the work hereunder.  Employee shall adhere to the Company’s expense reimbursement policies and shall follow those expense reimbursement procedures that generally apply to other Company employees.

f.

Perquisites .  Employee shall be entitled to receive such other executive perquisites, fringe and other benefits as are provided to officers and their families under any of the Company’s plans and/or programs in effect from time to time and such other benefits as are customarily available to officers of the Company and their families.

6.

Benefits .  During the Term, Employee (and, where applicable, Employee’s eligible dependents) shall be eligible to participate in the various Company welfare benefit plans, practices and policies (including, without limitation, medical, prescription, dental, vision, disability, employee life, accidental death and travel accident insurance plans and programs) to the extent and in accordance with the terms of those plans as generally provided to officers or other similarly situated employees of the Company.  In addition, Employee shall be eligible to participate, pursuant to their terms, in any other benefit plans offered by the Company to officers or other employees (excluding plans applicable solely to certain officers of the Company in accordance with the express terms of such plans), including, without limitation, the 401(k) Retirement and Savings Plan and CDP/SERP Plan.  Collectively the plans and arrangements described in this Paragraph 6 and as they may be amended or modified in accordance with their terms are hereinafter referred to as the “Benefits Plans.”  Notwithstanding the above, Employee understands and acknowledges that Employee is not eligible for benefits under the Dollar General Corporation Severance Plan and that the only severance benefits Employee is entitled to are set forth in this Agreement.

7.

Termination for Cause .  Under the following conditions, each of which shall constitute “Cause” or “Termination for Cause”, this Agreement may be terminated immediately at any time by Company without any liability owing to Employee or Employee’s beneficiaries under this Agreement, except for those benefits owed under any other plan or agreement covering Employee which shall be governed by the terms of such plan or agreement:



3





a.

Any act involving fraud, dishonesty or material misrepresentation, or any material breach of applicable regulations of competent authorities in relation to trading or dealing with stocks, securities, investments and the like;

b.

Other than as required by law, the carrying out of any activity or the making of any public statement which prejudices or reduces the good name and standing of Company or any of its affiliates or would bring any one of these into public contempt or ridicule;

c.

Attendance at work in a state of intoxication or being found in possession of any prohibited drug or substance, possession of which would amount to a criminal offense;

d.

Assault or other act of violence against any employee of Company or other person; or

e.

Conviction of any felony whatsoever or any misdemeanor involving moral turpitude.

A termination for Cause shall be effective only if the Company has given Employee written notice of its intention to terminate for Cause, describing Employee’s acts or omissions that are believed to constitute Cause, and has given Employee fair opportunity to respond.

8.

Termination upon Death .  Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, this Agreement shall terminate immediately upon Employee’s death, and Company shall have no further liability to Employee or his/her beneficiaries under this Agreement, except for benefits under the Benefits Plans and Stock Plan covering Employee to the extent provided by the terms of such Benefits Plans and Stock Plan.

9.

Disability .  If a Disability (as defined below) of Employee occurs during the Term, the Company may notify Employee of the Company’s intention to terminate Employee’s employment.  In that event, employment shall terminate effective on the termination date provided in such notice of termination (the “Disability Effective Date”), and this Agreement shall terminate without further liability to Employee, except for benefits under the Benefits Plans and Stock Plan covering Employee to the extent provided by the terms of such Benefits Plans and Stock Plan.  In this Agreement, “Disability” means:

(a)

a long-term disability, as defined in the Company’s applicable long-term disability plan as then in effect; or



4





(b)

Employee’s inability reasonably to perform his/her duties under this Agreement because of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that (i) can reasonably be expected to result in death or (ii) has lasted or can reasonably be expected to last longer than ninety (90) consecutive days.  In this circumstance, the existence of a Disability shall be determined by the Company, in its sole and absolute discretion, upon receipt of competent medical advice from a qualified physician selected by or acceptable to the Company.  In this circumstance, Employee shall, if there is any question about his/her Disability, submit to a physical examination by a qualified physician selected by the Company. Nothing in this subsection (b) is intended to nor shall it be deemed to broaden or modify the definition of “disability” in the Company’s long-term disability plan.  

10.

Employee’s Termination of Employment .

a.

Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, Employee may terminate his/her employment and this Agreement at any time, for no reason, with thirty (30) days written notice to Company.  Upon such termination, Employee shall be entitled to his/her prorata Base Salary through the date of termination and such other vested benefits under any other plan or agreement covering Employee which shall be governed by the terms of such plan or agreement. Employee shall not be entitled to those payments and benefits listed in paragraph 11, unless he/she terminates his/her employment for Good Reason, as defined below.

b.

Good Reason shall mean any of the following actions taken by the Company:

(i)

a reduction by the Company in the Employee’s Base Salary or target bonus level;

(ii)

the Company shall fail to continue in effect any significant Company-sponsored compensation plan or benefit (without replacing it with a similar plan or with a compensation equivalent), unless such action is in connection with across-the-board plan changes or terminations similarly affecting at least ninety-five percent (95%) of all executive employees of the Company;

(iii)

Company’s principal executive offices shall be moved to a location outside the middle-Tennessee area, or Employee is required to be based anywhere other than the Company’s principal executive offices;



5





(iv)

Without his/her written consent, the assignment to the Employee by the Company of duties inconsistent with, or the significant reduction of the title, powers and functions associated with, Employee’s position, titles or offices, unless such action is the result of a restructuring or realignment of duties and responsibilities by the Company, for business reasons, that leaves Employee at the same officer level (i.e., Vice President, Executive Vice President, etc.) and with a similar level of responsibility, or is the result of Employee’s failure to meet pre-established and objective performance criteria, or is the result of his/her termination  for Disability or Cause;

(v)

Any material breach by the Company of any provision of this Agreement; or

(vi)

The failure of any successor (whether direct or indirect, by purchase, merger, consolidation or otherwise) to all or substantially all of the business and/or assets of the Company to assume expressly and agree to perform this Agreement in the same manner and to the same extent that the Company would be required to perform it if no such succession had taken place.

Good Reason shall not include Employee’s death or Disability.  The Company shall have the opportunity to cure any claimed event of Good Reason (other than subparagraph (vi) above) within thirty (30) days notice from Employee.

11.

Termination without Cause or by Employee for Good Reason .  If Employee’s employment is terminated by the Company without Cause which the Company may do at any time prior to the expiration of the Term (it being understood by the Parties that termination by death or Disability shall not constitute termination without Cause), Employee terminates for Good Reason (as defined above), or the Company fails to renew or extend the Term of this Employment Agreement unless such failure to renew or extend is accompanied with a mutually agreeable severance arrangement between the Company and the Employee or is the result of Employee’s voluntary retirement, then Employee shall be entitled (in lieu of the payments referenced in Paragraph 12 below, and not in addition to), only upon the execution and effectiveness of the Release attached hereto and made a part hereof, to continuation of Employee’s Base Salary as of the date immedi­ately preceding the termination for 24 months, payable in accordance with the Company’s normal payroll



6





cycle and procedures. In addition, Employee shall be entitled to outplacement services, provided by the Company, for one year or until other employment is secured, whichever comes first.

In the event that there is a breach by Employee of any continuing obligations under this Agreement after termination of employment, any unpaid amounts under this Paragraph 11 shall be forfeited.  Any payments or reimbursements under this Paragraph 11 shall not be deemed the continuation of Employee’s employment for any purpose.  The Company’s obligations under this Paragraph 11 will not negate or reduce (i) any amounts otherwise due but not yet paid to Employee by the Company, or (ii) any other amounts payable to Employee outside this Agreement, or any other rights that Employee may have, under the terms of any of the applicable Benefit Plans and Stock Plan as in effect on the employment termination date.  Further, the Company may, at any time and in its sole discretion, make a lump-sum payment of all amounts, or all remaining amounts, due to Employee under this Paragraph 11.

12.

Effect of Change in Control .

a.

If within two (2) years following a Change in Control (as hereafter defined), the Company (or any successor to the Company) terminates Employee’s employment without Cause or Employee terminates his/her employment for Good Reason, then upon the execution and the effectiveness of the Release attached hereto and made a part hereof, the Company shall pay to Employee (in lieu of the payments referenced in paragraph 11 above, and not in addition to):

(i)

a lump sum payment equal to two times Employee’s Base Salary in effect immediately prior to the Change in Control plus two times the amount of Employee’s target incentive bonus payment in effect immediately prior to the Change in Control;

(ii)

a lump sum payment in an amount equal to two (2) times the annual Employee contribution to participate in the Company’s medical, dental and vision benefits program;

(iii)

outplacement services, provided by the Company, for one year or until other employment is secured, whichever comes first; and



7





(iv)

Employee’s awards, if any, granted pursuant to the Stock Plan or any precursor or successor plan shall fully vest and shall remain exercisable in accordance with the terms of the Stock Plan.

b.

For purposes of Paragraph 12(a), the payments described therein shall be limited to the Capped Amount.  The “Capped Amount” shall be the amount otherwise payable under Paragraph 12(a), reduced in such amount and to such extent that no amount of the payment under Paragraph 12(a), plus all other “parachute payments” under Code Section 280G (collectively “Total Payments”), would constitute an “excess parachute payment” under Code Section 280G.  Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, the Employee’s Total Payments shall not be limited to the Capped Amount if it is determined that Employee would receive at least $25,000 in greater after-tax proceeds if no such reduction is made.  The calculation of the Capped Amount and all other determinations relating to the applicability of Code Section 280G (and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder) to the payments contemplated by this Employment Agreement shall be made by the tax department of the independent public accounting firm then responsible for preparing or auditing the Company’s consolidated federal income tax return, and such determinations shall be binding upon the Employee and the Company.

c.

Change in Control shall mean the date as of which any of the following occurs:

(i)

The Consummation of an acquisition after which any individual, entity or group within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (hereinafter “Exchange Act”) shall have beneficial ownership within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 promulgated under the Exchange Act (hereinafter “Beneficial Ownership”) of 35% or more of the Voting Securities of the Company; provided, however, that for purposes of the preceding sentence, the following acquisitions of Voting Securities of the Company shall not constitute a Change in Control:

(A)

ownership or an acquisition by Cal Turner, James Stephen Turner or a member or members of his/her or their immediate family or any trust, partnership, foundation or similar entity for the exclusive benefit of any such persons (collectively, the “Turner Family Interests”);



8





(B)

any acquisition directly from the Company;

(C)

any acquisition by the Company or an affiliate which the Company Controls;

(D)

any acquisition by any employee benefit plan (or related trust) sponsored or maintained by the Company or a subsidiary of the Company;

(E)

any acquisition by a qualified pension plan or publicly held mutual fund;

(F)

any acquisition by the Employee or a group within the meaning of Section 14(d) of the Exchange Act that includes the Employee; or

(G)

any Business Combination which would not otherwise constitute a Change in Control because of the application of clauses (A), (B) and (C) of Paragraph 12(c)(iii).

(ii)

A change in the composition of the Board of Directors of the Company whereby individuals who constitute the Board of Directors of the Company as of the Effective Date of this Agreement (plus any individual who shall become a director subsequent to such date whose election or nomination for election by the shareholders was approved by a vote of at least 75% of the directors then comprising the Board of Directors) (hereinafter “Incumbent Board”) cease for any reason to constitute at least a majority of the Board of Directors.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, no individual who shall become a director of the Board of Directors subsequent to the Effective Date whose initial assumption of office occurs as a result of an actual or threatened election contest (within the meaning of Rule 14a-11 of the Regulations promulgated under the Exchange Act) with respect to the election or removal of directors or other actual or threatened solicitation of proxies or consents by or on behalf of an individual, entity or group within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Exchange Act other than the Board of Directors shall be a member of the Incumbent Board.

(iii)

Consummation of a Business Combination, unless, immediately following such Business Combination, all of the following three conditions are met:



9





(A)

all or substantially all of the individuals and entities who held Beneficial Ownership, respectively, of the Voting Securities of the Company immediately prior to such Business Combination beneficially own, directly or indirectly, 65% or more of the combined voting power of the Voting Securities of the corporation surviving or resulting from such Business Combination, (including, without limitation, a corporation which as a result of such transaction holds Beneficial Ownership of all or substantially all of the Voting Securities of the Company or all or substantially all of the Company’s assets) (such surviving or resulting corporation to be referred to as “Surviving Company”), in substantially the same proportions as their ownership, immediately prior to such Business Combination, of the Voting Securities of the Company;

(B)

no individual, entity or group within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) or 14(d)(2) of the Exchange Act (excluding any corporation resulting from such Business Combination, the Turner Family Interests, any qualified pension plan, a publicly held mutual fund, the Employee, a group within the meaning of Section 14(d) of the Exchange Act that includes the Employee, or an employee benefit plan (or related trust) of the Company or Surviving Company) holds Beneficial Ownership, directly or indirectly, of 35% or more of the combined voting power of the then outstanding Voting Securities of Surviving Company except to the extent that such ownership existed immediately prior to the Business Combination; and

(C)

at least a majority of the members of the board of directors of the Surviving Company were members of the Incumbent Board at the earlier of the date of execution of the initial agreement, or of the action of the Board of Directors of the Company, providing for such Business Combination.

(iv)

For purposes of subparagraphs (i) - (iii) above, the terms below shall have the following meanings:

(A)

Business Combination ” shall mean a reorganization, merger or consolidation of the Company or sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company.



10





(B)

Consummation ” shall mean the completion of the final act necessary to complete a transaction as a matter of law, including, but not limited to, any required approvals by the corporation’s shareholders and board of directors, the transfer of legal and beneficial title to securities or assets and the final approval of the transaction by any applicable domestic or foreign governments or governmental agencies.

(C)

Control ” shall mean, in the case of a corporation, Beneficial Ownership of more than 50% of the combined voting power of the corporation’s Voting Securities, or in the case of any other entity, Beneficial Ownership of more than 50% of such entity’s voting equity interests.

(D)

Voting Securities ” shall mean the outstanding voting securities of a company entitling the holder thereof to vote generally in the election of such company’s directors.

13.

Publicity; No Disparaging Statement .  Except as otherwise provided in Paragraph 14 hereof, Employee and the Company covenant and agree that they shall not engage in any communi­cations which shall disparage one another or interfere with their existing or prospective business relationships.

14.

Confidentiality and Legal Process .  Employee represents and agrees that he/she will keep the terms, amount and fact of this Agreement confidential and that he/she will not hereafter disclose any information concerning this Agreement to any one other than his/her personal agents.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing in this Agreement is intended to prohibit Employee from performing any duty or obligation that shall arise as a matter of law.  Specifically, Employee shall continue to be under a duty to truthfully respond to any legal and valid subpoena or other legal process.  This Agreement is not intended in any way to proscribe Employee’s right and ability to provide information to any federal, state or local government in the lawful exercise of such government’s governmental functions.


15.

Business Protection Provision Definitions .

a.

Preamble .  As a material inducement to the Company to enter into this Agreement, and its recognition of the valuable experience, knowledge and proprietary information Employee will gain from his/her employment with the Company, Employee warrants and agrees he/she will abide by and adhere to the business protection provisions in Paragraphs 15, 16, 17, 18 and 19 herein.

b.

Definitions .  For purposes of Paragraphs 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20 herein, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

(i)

“Competitive Position” shall mean any employment, consulting, advisory, directorship, agency, promotional or independent contractor arrangement between the Employee and (x) any person or Entity engaged wholly or in material part in the business in which the Company is engaged, including but not limited to such other similar businesses as Wal-Mart, Family Dollar Stores, Fred’s, the 99 Cents Stores and Dollar Tree Stores, or (y) any person or Entity then attempting or planning to enter the business in which the Company is engaged (i.e., the deep discount consumable basics retail business) whereby the Employee is required to or does perform services on behalf of or for the benefit of such person or Entity which are substantially similar to the services Employee participated in or directed at any time while employed by the Company or any of its affiliates.

(ii)

“Confidential Information” shall mean the proprietary or confidential data, information, documents or materials (whether oral, written, electronic or otherwise) belonging to or pertaining to the Company, other than “Trade Secrets” (as defined below), which is of tangible or intangible value to the Company and the details of which are not generally known to the competitors of the Company.  Confidential Information shall also include any items marked “CONFIDENTIAL” or some similar designation or which are otherwise identified as being confidential.

(iii)

“Entity” or “Entities” shall mean any business, individual, partnership, joint venture, agency, governmental agency, body or subdivision, association, firm, corporation, limited liability company or other entity of any kind.

(iv)

“Restricted Period” shall mean two (2) years following the Employee’s termination date.

(v)

“Territory” shall include those states in which the Company maintains stores at Employee’s termination date.

(vi)

“Trade Secrets” shall mean information or data of or about the Company, including, but not limited to, technical or non-technical data, formulas, patterns, compilations, programs, devices, methods, techniques, drawings, processes, financial data, financial plans, product plans or lists of actual or potential customers or suppliers that:  (A) derives economic value, actual or potential, from not being generally known to, and not being readily ascertainable by proper means by, other persons who can obtain economic value from its disclosure or use; (B) is the subject of efforts that are reasonable under the circumstances to maintain its secrecy; and (C) any other information which is defined as a “trade secret” under applicable law.

(vii)

“Work Product” shall mean all tangible work product, property, data, documentation, “know-how,” concepts or plans, inventions, improvements, techniques and processes relating to the Company that were conceived, discovered, created, written, revised or developed by Employee during the term of his/her employment with the Company.

16.

Nondisclosure:  Ownership of Proprietary Property .

a.

In recognition of the need of the Company to protect its legitimate business interests during the Term of this Agreement and thereafter, Confidential Information and Trade Secrets, Employee hereby covenants and agrees that Employee shall regard and treat Trade Secrets and all Confidential Information as strictly confidential and wholly-owned by the Company and shall not, for any reason, in any fashion, either directly or indirectly, use, sell, lend, lease, distribute, license, give, transfer, assign, show, disclose, disseminate, reproduce, copy, misappropriate or otherwise communicate any such item or information to any third party or Entity for any purpose other than in accordance with this Agreement or as required by applicable law:  (i) with regard to each item constituting a Trade Secret, at all times such information remains a “trade secret” under applicable law, and (ii) with regard to any Confidential Information, for the Restricted Period.

b.

Employee shall exercise best efforts to ensure the continued confidentiality of all Trade Secrets and Confidential Information, and he/she shall immediately notify the Company of any unauthorized disclosure or use of any Trade Secrets or Confidential Information of which Employee becomes aware.  Employee shall assist the Company, to the extent necessary, in the protection of or procurement of any intellectual property protection or other rights in any of the Trade Secrets or Confidential Information.

c.

All Work Product shall be owned exclusively by the Company.  To the greatest extent possible, any Work Product shall be deemed to be “work made for hire” (as defined in the Copyright Act, 17 U.S.C.A. § 101 et seq., as amended), and Employee hereby unconditionally and irrevocably transfers and assigns to the Company all right, title and interest Employee currently has or may have by operation of law or otherwise in or to any Work Product, including, without limitation, all patents, copyrights, trademarks (and the goodwill associated therewith), trade secrets, service marks (and the goodwill associated therewith) and other intellectual property rights.  Employee agrees to execute and deliver to the Company any transfers, assignments, documents or other instruments which the Company may deem necessary or appropriate, from time to time, to protect the rights granted herein or to vest complete title and ownership of any and all Work Product, and all associated intellectual property and other rights therein, exclusively in the Company.

17.

Non-Interference with Employees .  Employee covenants and agrees that during the Restricted Period he/she will not, either directly or indirectly, alone or in conjunction with any other person or Entity:  (a) actively recruit, solicit, attempt to solicit, or induce any person who is an exempt employee of the Company or any of its subsidiaries, or is an officer or exempt employee of any of the other DG Entities to leave or cease such employment for any reason whatsoever; or (b) hire or engage the services of any such person described in Paragraph 17(a) above in any business substantially similar or competitive with that in which the Company was engaged during his/her employment.

18.

Non-Interference with Business Relationships .

a.

Employee acknowledges that in the course of employment, he/she will learn about Company’s business, services, materials, programs and products and the manner in which they are developed, marketed, serviced and provided.  Employee knows and acknowledges that the Company has invested considerable time and money in developing its programs, agreements, stores, vendors, representatives, services, products and marketing techniques and that they are unique and original.  Employee further acknowledges that the Company must keep secret all pertinent information divulged to Employee and Company’s business concepts, ideas, programs, plans and processes, so as not to aid Company’s competitors.  Accordingly, Company is entitled to the following protection, which Employee agrees is reasonable:

b.

Employee covenants and agrees that during the Restricted Period, he/she will not, on his/her own behalf or on behalf of any person or Entity, solicit, direct, appropriate, call upon, or initiate communication or contact with any person or entity or any representative of any person or entity, with whom Employee had contact during his/her employment, in such a way as to interfere with Company’s business relationships.

19.

Agreement Not to Work in Competitive Position .

a.

Employee covenants and agrees not to obtain or work in a Competitive Position within the Territory for the Restricted Period.

b.

Employee and Company expressly covenant and agree that the scope, territorial, time and other restrictions contained in this entire Agreement constitute the most reasonable and equitable restrictions possible to protect the business interest of the Company given: (i) the business of the Company; (ii) the competitive nature of the Company’s industry; and (iii) that Employee’s skills are such that he/she could easily find alternative, commensurate employment or consulting work in his/her field which would not violate any of the provisions of this Agreement.  The Employee further acknowledges that the compensation and benefits described in Paragraphs 5, 11 and 12 are also in consideration of his/her covenants and agreements contained in Paragraphs 15 through 19 hereof.

20.

Return of Materials . Upon the Employee’s termination, or at any point after that time, upon the specific request of the Company, Employee shall return to the Company all written or descriptive materials of any kind belonging or relating to the Company or its affiliates, including, without limitation, any originals, copies and abstracts containing any Work Product, intellectual property, Confidential Information and Trade Secrets in Employee’s possession or control.

21.

General Provisions .

a.

Amendment .  This Agreement may be amended or modified only by a writing signed by both of the parties hereto.

b.

Binding Agreement .  This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of and be binding upon Employee, his/her heirs and personal representatives, and the Company and its successors and assigns.

c.

Waiver Of Breach; Specific Performance .  The waiver of a breach of any provision of this Agreement shall not operate or be construed as a waiver of any other breach.  Each of the parties to this Agreement will be entitled to enforce its or his/her rights under this Agreement, specifically, to recover damages by reason of any breach of any provision of this Agreement and to exercise all other rights existing in its or his/her favor.  The parties hereto agree and acknowledge that money damages may not be an adequate remedy for any breach of the provisions of this Agreement and that any party may in its or his/her sole discretion apply to any court of law or equity of competent jurisdiction for specific performance or injunctive relief in order to enforce or prevent any violations of the provisions of this Agreement.

d.

Unsecured General Creditor .  The Company shall neither reserve nor speci­fically set aside funds for the payment of its obligations under this Agreement, and such obligations shall be paid solely from the general assets of the Company.

e.

No Effect On Other Arrangements .  It is expressly understood and agreed that the payments made in accordance with this Agreement are in addition to any other benefits or compensation to which Employee may be entitled or for which he/she may be eligible, whether funded or unfunded, by reason of his/her employment with the Company.

f.

Tax Withholding .  There shall be deducted from each payment under this Agreement the amount of any tax required by any govern­mental authority to be withheld and paid over by the Company to such governmental authority for the account of Employee.

g.

Notices .

(i)

All notices and all other communications provided for herein shall be in writing and delivered personally to the other designated party, or mailed by certified or registered mail, return receipt requested, or delivered by a recognized national overnight courier service, or sent by facsimile, as follows:

If to Company to:

Dollar General Corporation

Attn: General Counsel1 Mission RidgeGoodlettsville, TN  37072-2171Facsimile: (615)855-5180



11






If to Employee to:

Susan Lanigan

123 Walnut Drive

Hendersonville, TN 37075


(ii)

All notices sent under this Agreement shall be deemed given twenty-four (24) hours after sent by facsimile or courier, seventy-two (72) hours after sent by certified or registered mail and when delivered if personal delivery.

(iii)

Either party hereto may change the address to which notice is to be sent hereunder by written notice to the other party in accordance with the provisions of this Paragraph.

h.

Governing Law .  This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Tennessee (without giving effect to conflict of laws).

i.

Entire Agreement .  This Agreement contains the full and complete understanding of the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter contained herein and this Agreement supersedes and replaces any prior agreement, either oral or written, which Employee may have with Company that relates generally to the same subject matter.

j.

Assignment .  This Agreement may not be assigned by Employee, and any attempted assignment shall be null and void and of no force or effect.

k.

Severability .  If any one or more of the terms, provisions, covenants or restrictions of this Agreement shall be determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid, void or unenforceable, then the remainder of the terms, provisions, covenants and restrictions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect, and to that end the provisions hereof shall be deemed severable.

l.

Paragraph Headings .  The paragraph headings set forth herein are for convenience of reference only and shall not affect the meaning or interpretation of this Agreement whatsoever.

m.

Interpretation .  Should a provision of this Agreement require judicial interpretation, it is agreed that the judicial body interpreting or construing the Agreement shall not apply the assumption that the terms hereof shall be more strictly construed against one party by reason of the rule of construction that an instrument is to be construed more strictly against the party which itself or through its agents prepared the agreement, it being agreed that all parties and/or their agents have participated in the preparation hereof.

n.

Voluntary Agreement .  Employee and Company represent and agree that each has reviewed all aspects of this Agreement, has carefully read and fully understands all provisions of this Agreement, and is voluntarily entering into this Agreement.  Each party represents and agrees that such party has had the opportunity to review any and all aspects of this Agreement with legal, tax or other adviser(s) of such party’s choice before executing this Agreement.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed, or caused their duly authorized representative to execute, this Agreement effective the 15 day of March, 2005.



 

“COMPANY”

     
 

DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION

     
 

By:

/s/ David A. Perdue

     
 

Its:

CEO

     
     
 

“EMPLOYEE”

     
 

/s/ Susan Lanigan

 

Susan Lanigan

     
 

Witnessed By:

   
 

/s/ Jeffrey R. Rice



12





Addendum to Employment

Agreement with ___________________

RELEASE AGREEMENT

THIS RELEASE (“Release”) is made and entered into by and between _________________ (“Employee”) and DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION , and its successor or assigns (“Company”).

WHEREAS, Employee and Company have agreed that Employee’s employment with Dollar General Corporation shall terminate on ___________________;

WHEREAS, Employee and the Company have previously entered into that certain Employment Agreement, effective _____________________ (“Agreement”), that this Release is incorporated therein by reference;

WHEREAS, Employee and Company desire to delineate their respective rights, duties and obligations attendant to such termination and desire to reach an accord and satisfaction of all claims arising from Employee’s employment, and his termination of employment, with appropriate releases, in accordance with the Agreement;

WHEREAS, the Company desires to compensate Employee in accordance with the Agreement for service he/she has provided or will provide for the Company;

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and the agreements of the parties set forth in this Release, and other good and valuable consideration the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto, intending to be legally bound, hereby covenant and agree as follows:

1.

Claims Released Under This Agreement .

In exchange for receiving the benefits described in Paragraph 11 or 12 of the Agreement, I hereby voluntarily and irrevocably waive, release, dismiss with prejudice, and withdraw all claims, complaints, suits or demands of any kind whatsoever (whether known or unknown) which I ever had, may have, or now have against Company and other current or former subsidiaries or affiliates of the Company and their past, present and future officers, directors, employees, agents, insurers and attorneys (collectively, the “Releasees”), arising from or relating to (directly or indirectly) my employment or the termination of my employment or other events occurred as of the date of execution of this Agreement, including but not limited to:

a.

claims for violations of Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, the Age Discrimination in Employment Act, the Fair Labor Standards Act, the Civil Rights Act of 1991, the Americans With Disabilities Act, the Equal Pay Act, the Family and Medical Leave Act, 42 U.S.C. § 1981, the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002, the National Labor Relations Act, the Labor Management Relations Act, Executive Order 11246, Executive Order 11141, the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, or the Employee Retirement Income Security Act;

b.

claims for violations of any other federal or state statute or regulation or local ordinance;

c.

claims for lost or unpaid wages, compensation, or benefits, defamation, intentional or negligent infliction of emotional distress, assault, battery, wrongful or constructive discharge, negligent hiring, retention or supervision, fraud, misrepresentation, conversion, tortious interference, breach of contract, or breach of fiduciary duty;

d.

claims to benefits under any bonus, severance, workforce reduction, early retirement, outplacement, or any other similar type plan sponsored by the Company (except for benefits specifically provided for under the Benefits Plans as specified in Section 2, below); or

e.

any other claims under state law arising in tort or contract.

2.

Claims Not Released Under This Agreement .

In signing this Agreement, I am not releasing any claims that may arise under the terms of this Agreement or which may arise out of events occurring after the date I execute this Agreement.

I am also not releasing claims to benefits that I am already entitled to receive under the Benefits Plans.  However, I understand and acknowledge that nothing herein is intended to or shall be construed to require the Company to institute or continue in effect any particular plan or benefit sponsored by the Company and the Company hereby reserves the right to amend or terminate any of its benefit programs at any time in accordance with the procedures set forth in such plans.

Nothing in this Agreement shall prohibit me from engaging in protected activities under applicable law or from communicating, either voluntarily or otherwise, with any governmental agency concerning any potential violation of the law.

3.

No Assignment of Claim .  Employee represents that he/she has not assigned or transferred, or purported to assign or transfer, any claims or any portion thereof or interest therein to any party prior to the date of this Release.

4.

Compensation .  In accordance with the Agreement, the Company agrees to pay the Employee, or if he/she becomes eligible for payments under Paragraph 11 or 12 but dies before receipt thereof, his/her spouse or his/her estate, as the case may be, the amount provided in Paragraph 11 or 12 of the Agreement.

5.

Publicity; No Disparaging Statement .  Except as otherwise provided in Paragraph 14 of the Agreement, Employee and the Company covenant and agree that they shall not engage in any communi­cations which shall disparage one another or interfere with their existing or prospective business relationships.

6.

No Admission Of Liability .  This Release shall not in any way be construed as an admission by the Company or Employee of any improper actions or liability whatsoever as to one another, and each specifically disclaims any liability to or improper actions against the other or any other person, on the part of itself or himself/herself, its or his/her employees or agents.

7.

Voluntary Execution .  Employee warrants, represents and agrees that he/she has been encouraged in writing to seek advice from anyone of his/her choosing regarding this Release, including his/her attorney and accountant or tax advisor prior to his/her signing it; that this Release represents written notice to do so; that he/she has been given the opportunity and sufficient time to seek such advice; and that he/she fully understands the meaning and contents of this Release. He/she further represents and warrants that he/she was not coerced, threatened or otherwise forced to sign this Release, and that his/her signature appearing hereinafter is voluntary and genuine.  EMPLOYEE UNDERSTANDS THAT HE/SHE MAY TAKE UP TO TWENTY-ONE (21) DAYS TO CONSIDER WHETHER OR NOT HE/SHE DESIRES TO ENTER INTO THIS RELEASE.

8.

Ability to Revoke Agreement .  EMPLOYEE UNDERSTANDS THAT HE/SHE MAY REVOKE THIS RELEASE BY NOTIFYING THE COMPANY IN WRITING OF SUCH REVOCATION WITHIN SEVEN (7) DAYS OF HIS/HER EXECUTION OF THIS RELEASE AND THAT THIS RELEASE IS NOT EFFECTIVE UNTIL THE EXPIRATION OF SUCH SEVEN (7) DAY PERIOD.  HE/SHE UNDERSTANDS THAT UPON THE EXPIRATION OF SUCH SEVEN (7) DAY PERIOD THIS RELEASE WILL BE BINDING UPON HIM/HER AND HIS/HER HEIRS, ADMINISTRATORS, REPRESENTATIVES, EXECUTORS, SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS AND WILL BE IRREVOCABLE.

Acknowledged and Agreed To:

“COMPANY”

DOLLAR GENERAL CORPORATION

By:


Its:


I UNDERSTAND THAT BY SIGNING THIS RELEASE, I AM GIVING UP RIGHTS I MAY HAVE.  I UNDERSTAND THAT I DO NOT HAVE TO SIGN THIS RELEASE.

“EMPLOYEE”


Date


WITNESSED BY:


Date




13




SUBSIDIARIES OF THE REGISTRANT

   

Name of Entity

Jurisdiction of Incorporation/Organization

   

Dade Lease Management, Inc.

Delaware

Dolgencorp, Inc.

Kentucky

Dolgencorp of New York, Inc. (1)

Kentucky

Dolgencorp of Texas, Inc. (1)

Kentucky

      DG Transportation, Inc. (1)

Tennessee

DG Logistics, LLC (2)

Tennessee

DGC Properties, LLC (2)

Delaware

Dollar General Financial, Inc.

Tennessee

Nations Title Company, Inc. (3)

Tennessee

The Greater Cumberland Insurance Company (3)

Vermont

            Ashley River Insurance Company, Inc. (4)

South Carolina

Dollar General Investment, Inc.

Delaware

Lonestar Administrative Services, Inc.

Tennessee

DGC Holdings, LLC

Delaware

Dollar General Global Sourcing Limited (5)

Hong Kong

Dollar General Literacy Foundation (6)

Tennessee

Dollar General Partners (7)

Kentucky

DGC Properties of Kentucky, LLC (8)

Delaware

Dollar General Stores, Ltd. (9)

Kentucky

Dollar General Intellectual Property, L.P. (10)

Vermont

     


(1)

A wholly-owned subsidiary of Dolgencorp, Inc.

(2)

Dolgencorp, Inc. is the sole member.

(3)

A wholly-owned subsidiary of Dollar General Financial, Inc.

(4)

A wholly-owned subsidiary of The Greater Cumberland Insurance Company.

(5)

Held 99.9% by Dollar General Corporation and 0.1% by DGC Holdings, LLC.

(6)

A nonprofit, public benefit membership corporation.  Dollar General Corporation is the sole member.

(7)

A general partnership in which the general partners are Dade Lease Management, Inc., Dolgencorp, Inc. and Dollar General Financial, Inc.

(8)

A limited liability company in which Dollar General Partners is the sole member.

(9)

A limited partnership in which the general partner is Dolgencorp, Inc. and the limited partner is Dade Lease Management, Inc.

(10)

A limited partnership in which the general partner is Dade Lease Management, Inc. and the limited partner is The Greater Cumberland Insurance Company.








CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED

PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM



We consent to the incorporation by reference in the Registration Statements and related Prospectuses of Dollar General Corporation listed below of our reports dated April 5, 2005, with respect to the consolidated financial statements of Dollar General Corporation, Dollar General Corporation management’s assessment of  the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, and the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting of Dollar General Corporation, included in this Annual Report (Form 10-K) for the year ended January 28, 2005:


Form S-8, Registration No. 333-102653, and Form S-8, Registration No. 333-65789, each pertaining to the Dollar General Corporation 401(k) Savings and Retirement Plan.


Form S-4, Registration No. 333-42704, pertaining to the offer to exchange up to $200,000,000 of 8 5/8% Exchange Notes due June 15, 2010 for any and all outstanding 8 5/8% Notes due
June 15, 2010.


Form S-8, Registration No. 333-93309, pertaining to the Dollar General Corporation Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan and Compensation Deferral Plan (n/k/a Dollar General Corporation CDP/SERP Plan).


Form S-8, Registration No. 333-120126, pertaining to the Dollar General Corporation CDP/SERP Plan and Deferred Compensation Plan for Non-Employee Directors.


Form S-8, Registration No. 333-09448, and Form S-8, Registration No. 333-105900, each pertaining to the Dollar General Corporation 1998 Stock Incentive Plan.


Form S-8, Registration No. 333-00141, pertaining to the Dollar General Corporation 1995 Employee Stock Incentive Plan and the 1995 Stock Option Plan for Outside Directors.


Form S-8, Registration No. 33-51589, pertaining to the Dollar General Corporation 1993 Employee Stock Incentive Plan.


Form S-8, Registration No. 33-31827, pertaining to the Dollar General Corporation 1989 Employee Stock Incentive Plan.


Form S-8, Registration No. 333-113645, pertaining to the Dollar General Corporation Employment Agreement with David A. Perdue.



/s/ Ernst & Young LLP



Nashville, Tennessee

April 5, 2005










CERTIFICATIONS


I, David A. Perdue, certify that:


1.

I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Dollar General Corporation;


2.

Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;


3.

Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;


4.

The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:


(a)  Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;


(b)  Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;


(c)  Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

(d)  Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and


5.

The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):


(a)  All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and







(b)  Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.



Date:  April 12, 2005

 

/s/ David A. Perdue

   

David A. Perdue

   

Chief Executive Officer



I, David M. Tehle, certify that:


1.

I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Dollar General Corporation;


2.

Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;


3.

Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;


4.

The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:


(a)  Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;


(b)  Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;


(c)   Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

(d)  Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and


5.

The registrant’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):







(a)  All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and


(b)  Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.



Date:  April 12, 2005

 

/s/ David M. Tehle

   

David M. Tehle

   

Chief Financial Officer






CERTIFICATIONS

Pursuant to 18 U.S.C. Section 1350


Each of the undersigned hereby certifies that to his knowledge the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the fiscal year ended January 28, 2005 of Dollar General Corporation (the “Company”) filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and that the information contained in such report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.




 

/s/ David A. Perdue

 

Name:

David A. Perdue

 

Title:

Chief Executive Officer

 

Date:

April 12, 2005




 

/s/ David M. Tehle

 

Name:

David M. Tehle

 

Title:

Chief Financial Officer

 

Date:

April 12, 2005